Home

Service Manual TDS 500D, TDS 600B & TDS 700D Digitizing

1. Figure 5 2 Hookup for probe compensation b Initialize the oscilloscope Press save recall SETUP Press the main menu button Recall Factory Setup Press the side menu button OK Confirm Factory Init c Modify the initialized front panel control settings Press AUTOSET Set the horizontal SCALE to 250 us Press SET LEVEL TO 50 as required to trigger the signal Press SHIFT then press ACQUIRE MENU Press the main menu button Mode Then press the side menu button Average 16 2 Compensate the Probe a Locate the probe compensation hole in the side of the probe body b Using the probe compensation tool adjust the probe for best square wave compensation flat as possible across its top See Figures 5 3 and 5 4 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 5 11 Adjustment Procedures Figure 5 3 Performing probe compensation Probe compensated correctly Probe overcompensated Probe undercompensated Figure 5 4 Proper and improper probe compensation 3 Disconnect the hookup Disconnect the probe from the probe compensator terminals leave probe installed on CH 1 and leave the oscilloscope control setup as is for doing the next part of probe adjustment 5 12 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Adjustment Procedures
2. Diagrams This contains the block diagram and the interconnection diagram for the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscopes Symbols Graphic symbols and class designation letters are based on ANSI Standard Y32 2 1975 Abbreviations are based on ANSI Y1 1 1972 Logic symbology is based on ANSI IEEE Std 91 1984 in terms of positive logic Logic symbols depict the logic function performed and can differ from the manufacturer s data The tilde preceding a signal name indicates that the signal performs its intended function when in the low state Other standards used in the preparation of diagrams by Tektronix Inc are m Tektronix Standard 062 2476 Symbols and Practices for Schematic Drafting m ANSI Y14 159 1971 Interconnection Diagrams m ANSI Y32 16 1975 Reference Designations for Electronic Equipment Wm MIL HDBK 63038 1A Military Standard Technical Manual Writing Handbook TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 9 1 Diagrams A12 Front Panel Board Front Panel Menu S witches Switches Front Panel Knobs 26 A10 Acquisition P2 e Board 1201 G 4 77 1550 O 7 1000 G9 7 4 77 11001 G 77 15 Pins J1002 NC 4 77 Attenuator
3. Cc C D C ez gt Figure 4 6 Measurement of DC accuracy at maximum offset and position f Check against limits m CHECK that the readout for the measurement Mean readout on screen is within the limits listed for the current vertical scale and position offset generator settings Enter value on test record m Repeat substep d reversing the polarity of the position offset and generator settings as is listed in the table m CHECK that the Mean measurement readout on screen is within the limits listed for the current vertical scale setting and position offset generator settings Enter value on test record m Repeat substeps c through f until all vertical scale settings listed in Table 4 3 are checked for the channel under test g Testall channels Repeat substeps a through f for all four channels 3 Disconnect the hookup a Set the generator output to 0 V b Disconnect the cable from the generator output at the input connector of the channel last tested TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 35 Performance Tests Check Analog Bandwidth Equipment required One sine wave generator Item 14 One level meter and power sensor Item 15 One power splitter Item 16 One female N to male BNC adapter Item 18 Four male N to female BNC adapters Item 17 Two 50 precision cables Item 5
4. th ill the diag nostics Nes i dus val a N eub Replace the A10 i 1 Acquisition module pass but sometime later troubleshooting procedure module cquisitio powers down on its own Yes f Perform the Module isolation troubleshooting procedure Figure 6 26 Primary troubleshooting procedure 6 60 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Troubleshooting on again and Replace the observe the LED All DRAM DS1 Does it Figure 6 36 Processor Display only display module 1 8 on again and observe the LED DS1 Does it display E Perform the A16 Low voltage power supply module isolation Replace the A17 troubleshooting procedure 1 J 26 Pin 4 See Main LV Power Supply module Replace the All DRAM Processor Display module Y J28 Pin 100 See Figure P ower off the oscilloscope and remove its cabinet using the Rear Cover and Cabinet removal procedure On the All DRAM Processor Display module set 510015 eighth switch to the open position on U604 Pins 5 7 9 or 11 of the A10 Acquisition module See Figure 6 37 Replace the A15 Attenuator module 0 No Replace the A10 Acquisition module Does Press 1002 on the first flash 8 then DS1 flash 8 A11 DRAM display a sequence of hex then display the sequence Process
5. Measurement of trigger level accuracy Initial test hookup Measurement of trigger sensitivity 50 MHz results shown on a TDS 684B screen Figure 4 20 Figure 4 21 Figure 4 22 Figure 4 23 Figure 4 24 Figure 4 25 Figure 4 26 Figure 4 27 Figure 4 28 Figure 4 29 Figure 4 30 Initial test hookup Measurement of main trigger out limits Initial test hookup Measurement of probe compensator frequency Subsequent test hookup Measurement of probe compensator amplitude Jitter test hookup Jitter test displayed waveform TDS 684B shown Jitter test when completed TDS 684B shown Triggered signal range test 300 mV Triggered signal range test 75 mV TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Table of Contents Figure 4 31 60 Hz Rejection test hookup 4 77 Figure 4 32 60 Hz Rejection test setup signal 4 77 Figure 4 33 Subsequent 60 Hz Rejection test hookup 4 78 Figure 4 34 60 Hz Rejection test result TDS 684B shown 4 79 Figure 4 35 Line count accuracy test hookup 4 80 Figure 4 36 Line count accuracy test setup waveform TDS O84 B shown zoe Ey soo he RR EE ER E Er S
6. For some selections pushing a main menu button pops up a menu 18 of subfunctions Example Push Type 17 Note the pop up menu for Type is set to Edge All the main menu buttons to the right of the pop up menu are labeled with subfunctions of Edge Pushing the button that popped up the menu 17 toggles through the pop up menu choices Example Repeatedly push Type to move through the pop up menu Notice the other main menu button labels change accordingly Push Type to move back to Edge Complete the setting of the desired mode by selecting from the main menu and the side menu that results Example Push Mode amp Holdoff 16 and then push Normal 15 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Operating Instructions 2 Setupa function using the general purpose knob 20 The examples of possible menu selections in the substeps that follow assume you have pushed TRIGGER MENU 19 SELECT TeK Stopped 29898 Acquisitions Trigger Level 20mv t T E Level Level 4 Set to TTL Set to ECL Set to 50 MM s00mvv P M5 00us Chi F 20mV Source Coupling Slope Level ode Type f amp chi DC a Pushing some main menu buttons displays side menu with labels containing readouts that can be varied Example Push Level 21 b Pushing the side
7. Mechanical Parts List Mechanical Parts List Parts Ordering Information Using the Replaceable Parts List TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Table of Contents List of Figures Figure 2 1 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 shown Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 position Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 4 9 Figure 4 10 Figure 4 11 Figure 4 12 Figure 4 13 Figure 4 14 Figure 4 15 Map of Display Functions Map of display functions eee Verifying adjustments and signal path compensation Universal test hookup for functional tests TDS 600B Measurement of DC offset accuracy at zero setting Initial test hookup Measurement of DC accuracy at maximum offset and Initial test hookup Optional initial test hookup Measurement of analog bandwidth Initial test hookup Measurement of channel delay TDS 684B shown Initial test hookup Measurement of accuracy Long term and delay time Initial test hookup Measurement of time accuracy for pulse and glitch triggering 5 Ip esr enr ny mra eb hn ro erred RS ROME Figure 4 16 Figure 4 17 Figure 4 18 Figure 4 19 Initial test hookup
8. C1 542mV C1 Freq 999 62MH2 M 1 00ns Chit 40mV 23 Feb 1994 15 38 29 em 9 C 2 om ce Figure 4 9 Measurement of analog bandwidth g Check against limits 4 40 CHECK that the Pk Pk readout on screen is within the limits listed in Table 4 4 for the current vertical scale setting Enter voltage on test record When finished checking set the horizontal SCALE back to the 50 ns setting TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests STOP Checking each channel s bandwidth at all vertical scale settings is time consuming and unnecessary You may skip checking the remaining vertical scale settings in Table 4 4 that is skip the following substep h if this oscilloscope has performed as follows m Passed the 100 mV vertical scale setting just checked in this procedure Passed the Verify Internal Adjustment Self Compensation and Diagnostics procedure found under Self Tests on page 4 5 NOTE Passing the signal path compensation confirms the signal path for all vertical scale settings for all channels Passing the internal diagnostics ensures that the factory set adjustment constants that control the bandwidth for each vertical scale setting have not changed h Check remaining vertical scale settings against limits optional m If d
9. VO cte tee e usb dette riae terr hortos em Display 5e Oed au IO a tote ho o od Nominal Traits isc ccs eee rr os Y e wastes es Warranted Characteristics Typical Characteristics Operating Information Installation een Genie ince Supplying Operating Operating Environment 0 cece ccc ee ene eens Applying and Interrupting Power Repackaging Instructions 00 0c cect eh Installed Options 135 eR Dex RU CE Red OU I ER RESTE RUE S Operating Instructions Screen Layouts 445 el Le e ER Ree eun due Gh ques qe n wu pom Sed SERT E a Basic Procedures ced etr ie dae pe RE bed ad beet S o eredi E TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual xi xiii XV XV xvi xvii xviii xix xix xix xxi 2 1 2 1 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 5 2 7 2 7 2 7 Table of Contents Theory of Operation Theory of Operation 3 1 Logic Conventions sees cee kb ceed be sree gb sree ecb de Sere deg HN EUROS 3 1 Module Overview os EE SUR vt y ere eee ea E CURED 3 1 Performance Verification Procedures Performance Verification Procedures 4 1 Input Channels vs Model 0 00 cee eee cc ee 4 2 ConV
10. ir eee ee xu ae s Remove Gating Reference Measrmnt Setup Snapshot NEU EEE Measrmnt OFF Histogram Levels Gpe Figure 4 39 Sync duty cycle test one div neg pulse waveform m Turn the pulse generator PULSE DURATION variable control to adjust the negative pulse so the oscilloscope s CH1 Width measurement displays 400ns 10 ns m Turn the HORIZONTAL SCALE knob to set the oscilloscope time base to 5ps div m Turn the pulse generator PERIOD variable control to adjust the period until the oscilloscope CH1 Period measurement reads 21 000us 25 50 ns See Figure 440 Read note shown below NOTE The pulse duration and period adjustments are critical in making this measurement If the pulse duration and or the duty cycle are not stable the FLEXFMT function may not function You must take care when making these adjustments TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 85 Performance Tests 4 86 Run 10 0MS s Sample fam 2 ir uc de qnt Hatte i zi s Remove Gating Reference Measrmnt Setup Snapshot for Ch Measrmnt OFF Histogram Levels Select Measurement chi width 400ns ow resolution Ch1 Period 21 0005 Low signal Frequency amplitude Positi width Negative width w 77 UT M Soos Chi LA 135mV mote
11. he Low volta module see Figure 6 36 and power back on p Bower Suppi dramatically decrease when the ON STBY button is toggled Replace the Al2 Front Panel module gt Probe J 26 and J 27 but DO NOT REMOVE the cables from the f in 2 6 7 11 16 connector see Figure 6 36 ese pins Are dk n 15 TR V The voltages will change if the 15 V 415 V 5 1 45 V 5 1 V and 45 1 V A11 DRAM Processor Display 5 V and 45 1 V respectively module is not connected to the respectively power supply Probe J 26 pins 7 11 17 and 35 and J 27 pin 17 There must be a problem with the Perform the Low communication link between the A11 Voltage Power Supply DRAM Processor Display and the A12 troubleshooting Front Panel The A12 Front Panel module procedure has most likely failed Replace this module Does the Front Panel work correctly now Y Yes Replace the A11 DRAM Processor Display module Figure 6 34 Processor front panel troubleshooting procedure 6 68 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Troubleshooting Attach a probe to the PROBE COMPENSATION signal located on the front of the oscilloscope Connect the probe to a channel s BNC on the front select the channel and view the output on the display Do this for all the channels Setall the channels to the same vertical scale Do all and select a channel that works correctly the channels Attach the PRO
12. Measure Probe Bandwidth Equipment One high frequency sine wave generator with its leveling head Item 13 reales One BNC female to female BNC adapter Item 1 One BNC to probe tip adapter Item 2 One P6139A 10X probe Item 18 1 Install the test hookup and preset the oscilloscope controls a Expose the Inner Probe Tip Follow the instructions in Figure 5 5 Pull forward to remove the ground lead Unscrew the assembly ribbed 3 ferrule tip cover and pull forward to remove 2 Pull forward to remove the retractable hook tip 0 1 Figure 5 5 Exposing the Inner Probe Tip b Hook up test signal source m Connect the output of a high frequency sine wave generator through its leveling head to a female to female adapter See Figure 5 6 m Connect the female to female adapter to a BNC to probe tip adapter m Plug the probe tip from the probe on CH 1 into the BNC to probe tip adapter TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 5 13 Adjustment Procedures 5 14 Leveled Sine Wave Generator Oscilloscope BNC Female to F emale BNC to Probe BNC Adapti piod Tip Adapter ea Figure 5 6 Initial test hookup c Initialize the oscilloscope Press save recall SETUP Press the main menu button Recall Factory Setup Press the side menu button OK Confirm Factory Init d Modify the initialized front panel control settings Set the vertical SC
13. V v Y 12 CIO c Push the front panel button that corresponds to the menu containing the function A main menu 14 for selecting among related functions appears Example Push VERTICAL MENU Note the two labels the top label is a function to choose from the bottom label tells you the current setting for that function Offset is currently set to 0 V d Select a function from the main menu using the main menu buttons 12 A side menu for selecting among that the available settings for that function appears Example Push Coupling 13 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 2 11 Operating Instructions How to Set Complex Functions e Select the setting for the function from the side menu 9 using the side menu buttons 11 Example Push AC 10 A few functions require more than just two levels main and side of menus to completely specify their settings In such cases either the main menu the side menu or both are modified to supply additional choices The procedures that follow show both schemes 1 Setup a function using pop up menus Tek Run 5 00GS 5 Sample Holdoff 250ns Mode amp Holdoff Normal Default Holdoff 25 ns t M soops chi 27mv BREST 18 Source Coupling iat eh 25 i Holdoff 16
14. Figure 4 3 Universal test hookup for functional tests TDS 600B shown b Initialize the oscilloscope Press save recall SETUP m Press the main menu button Recall Factory Setup Press the side menu button OK Confirm Factory Init 2 Verify that all channels operate Do the following substeps test CH 1 first skipping substep a and b since CH 1 is already set up for verification and as the trigger source from step 1 a Select an unverified channel m Press WAVEFORM OFF to remove the channel just verified from display Press the front panel button that corresponds to the channel you are to verify 4 8 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Brief Procedures m Move the probe to the channel you selected b Match the trigger source to the channel selected m Press TRIGGER MENU m Press the main menu button Source Press the side menu button that corresponds to the channel selected Ch2 Ch3 or Ch4 Some TDS models use Ax1 and Ax2 instead of Ch3 and Ch4 c Setup the selected channel Set the vertical SCALE to 200 mV m Set the horizontal SCALE to 200 us Press CLEAR MENU to remove any menu that may be on the screen m Press SET LEVEL 50 d Verify that the channel is operational Confirm that the following statements are true m The vertical scale readout for the channel under test shows a setting of 200 mV and a square wave probe compensation signal about 2 5 divisions in
15. Figure 6 21 A16 Low voltage power supply removal A30 Display Assembly NOTE The display and the display driver board are a single module and must be and Supply Fuse removed and replaced as such They are listed as a single module in the Replaceable Parts List 1 Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed Have handy a screwdriver with a size T 15 Torx tip Items 1 and 2 Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram Inner Chassis Modules Figure 6 2 page 6 13 6 48 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures 2 Orient the oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the work surface and its rear is facing you 3 Remove the high voltage fuse If you are servicing this fuse remove the fuse from its fuse holder Reverse the procedure to reinstall WARNING Display tube handling Use care when handling a display tube If you N break a display tube it may implode scattering glass fragments with high velocity and possibly injuring you Wear protective clothing including safety glasses preferably a full face shield Avoiding striking the display tube with or against any object Display tube storage Store the display tube face down in a protected location placing it on a soft nonabrasive surface to prevent scratching the face plate 4 Remove the display tube a Take the precautions outlined in the warning above Reference F
16. PROBE COMPENSATION SIGNAL GND 0 5V ADJUST C wO ZN CH 3 CH4 ee V Input waveforms into these channels 7 Example CH 1 Push any channel s button 8 to display its waveform The last channel turned on determines which waveform is positioned and scaled The indicator above the channel last selected is lighted Example Push CH 1 then CH 2 Vertically 1 and horizontally 2 scale and position the waveform s selected Example Set the scale to 100 mV div and center the waveform On screen Stop and start acquiring waveforms 3 Example Push RUN STOP if not acquiring TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Operating Instructions e Adjust trigger level 6 to trigger the waveform s selected or use these buttons 5 to either set a trigger level at the mid amplitude level of the selected waveform or to force a single trigger Example Push SET LEVEL TO 50 3 Setall other functions using menus a Choose the waveform source 8 first if setting a vertical function else skip to step b Example Push CH 2 b Push SHIFT 4 if the function to be set is highlighted in blue else skip to step c Run 100kS s Sample 10 gt 11 100mVv M 5004s Cha 0 V oupling Bandvsiden Position Offset Cal Probe 14 PA initialized oO
17. Prerequisites See page 4 15 Also the probe and the oscilloscope channel it is attached to must have been calibrated as a reference receiver 1 Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls Opticallmpulse Optical Generator Attenuator Oscilloscope Fiber optic cable i Optical to electrical converter Figure 4 43 Reference receiver performance verification set up a Initialize the oscilloscope W Press SAVE RECALL SETUP Press the main menu button Recall Factory Setup Press the side menu button OK Confirm Factory Init b Connect the probe oscilloscope optical impulse generator OIG and the optical attenuator m Connect the optical probe to CH 1 of the oscilloscope under test see Figure 4 43 m See Table 4 11 If using a P6701B probe connect the OIG501 Item 24 OPTICAL OUTPUT to the optical attenuator Item 26 OPTICAL INPUT using a fiber optic cable Item 27 If using a P6703B probe connect the OIG502 Item 25 OPTICAL OUTPUT to the optical attenuator Item 26 OPTICAL INPUT using a fiber optic cable Item 27 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 93 Performance Tests 4 04 m Connect the optical probe on CH 1 of the oscilloscope to the OPTICAL OUTPUT of the optical attenuator using the fiber optic cable of the probe Set an optical impulse level that does not clip the vertical channel of the oscilloscope Set up the OIG to run with LOW impulse
18. Replace the All DRAM Processor Display module the Front Panel and or FP Proc Interface tests fail Did the Of the two the Front Panel FP Interface test must have failed Replace pur the A12 Front Panel module ail Yes Perform the Processor front panel troubleshooting procedure th The oscilloscope should be ok Run Are there the extended diagnostics the Did The Acquisition tests any failures with the discussion of the Diagnostics on the Attn Acq must have been the only Acquisition andor its page 6 57 explains how to do this Interface failure Replace the A10 interfaces and verify that all the modules pass fail Acquisition module Perform the Attenuator acquisition troubleshooting procedure Regardless Perform the of other failures did Processor acquisition the Acq Proc Interface troubleshooting test fail procedure Figure 6 27 Module isolation troubleshooting procedure 6 62 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Troubleshooting Use this procedure to determine if an oscilloscope problem is caused by the Low Voltage Power Supply Connect the oscilloscope to the correct power source Turn on the principal power switch Does the oscilloscope power on all the diagnostics pass but sometime later it powers off on its own D The oscilloscope may have powered off because it over
19. 1153 pin 24 pulse low swinging between Yes No Replace the A15 Attenuator module Figure 6 35 Attenuator acquisition troubleshooting procedure TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 69 Troubleshooting CAUTION Only probe points specified in the procedures You can cause catastrophic damage if you attempt to probe other points O Pin 100 Y OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO Z 332133335921 qu uu Pin3 J5 62 0 0 Pin 17 730 Pin 3 2 7 fd Pin 4 el a od Pin 5 co fess 43 Figure 6 36 A11 DRAM Processor Display module 6 70 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Troubleshooting TDS 600B top side UUUUUUU 0 db EP dedbdbdp nuum 8882008 000007 Wh 8888888 c a gt db L1 Pin5 Pin7 Pin 9 Pin 11 TDS 500 700D bottom side U1602 U604 U963 U1560 Pin5 Pin7 Pin 9 Pin 11 Figure 6 37 A10 Acquisition module test points TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Servi
20. 18 379 V to 17 621 V E TDS 794D Accuracy limits 10 mV 5 5 40 58 V 40 5755 V to 40 5845 V 0 5V 0 58V 0 5845 V to 0 5755 V 200 mV 0 456V 45 5345 V to 45 6655 V 5V 56V 5 6655 V to 5 5345 V 1V 2 5V 1455V 5 289 V to 5 711 V 0 25V 55V 5 711 V to 5 289 V d Display the test signal e Press VERTICAL MENU Press the main menu button Position Use the keypad to set vertical position to 5 divisions press 5 then ENTER on the keypad The baseline level will move off screen Press the main menu button Offset Use the keypad to set vertical offset to the positive polarity setting listed in the table for the current vertical scale setting The baseline level will remain off screen Set the generator to the level and polarity indicated in the table for the vertical scale position and offset settings you have made The DC test level should appear on screen If it doesn t return the DC accuracy check has failed for the current vertical scale setting of the current channel Measure the test signal Press CLEAR MENU Read the measurement results at the Mean measurement readout See Figure 4 6 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests Tek Run 100KS s Average Turm on the measurement called mean and read the results here 500 5 chi 965m 23 Feb 1994 12 20 36 C1 Mean 1 03820 V
21. Lees Circuit board removal A11 Processor display removal Hard disk removal Board bracket 1 A10 Acquisition board removal Floppy disk drive removal Rear chassis removal A16 Low voltage power supply removal Display assembly removal Display driver board removal Front subpanel removal Accessing the protection switch Primary troubleshooting procedure Module isolation troubleshooting procedure A16 Low voltage power supply module isolation hooting procedure Power supply voltage measurement locations Figure 6 30 Color display troubleshooting procedure Figure 6 31 Horizontal and vertical sync signals color display Figure 6 32 A video signal with white black and blanking levels c lor displ y 454 V VR ee Ike NER a ele n le Figure 6 33 Processor acquisition troubleshooting procedure Figure 6 34 Processor front panel troubleshooting procedure Figure 6 35 Attenuator acquisition troubleshooting procedure Figure 6 36 A11 DRAM Processor Display module Figure 6 37 A10 Acquisition module test point
22. Set the horizontal SCALE to 200 us Press SHIFT then press ACQUIRE MENU Press the main menu button Mode then press the side menu button Average Select 64 averages Do this with the keypad or the general purpose knob 2 Confirm Main and Delayed Trigger outputs are within limits for logic levels a Display the test signal Press WAVEFORM OFF to turn off CH 3 Press CH 2 to display that channel Set the vertical SCALE to 1 V Use the vertical POSITION knob to center the display on screen b Measure logic levels Press MEASURE then press the main menu button Select Measurement for Ch2 Select high and low measurements To do this repeatedly press the side menu button more until High and Low appear in the side menu their icons are shown at the left Press both side menu buttons High and Low c Check Main Trigger output against limits Skip the first three subparts of this substep for the TDS 794D only CHECK that the Ch2 High readout is 22 5 volts and that the Ch2 Low readout is lt 0 7 volts See Figure 4 21 Enter high and low voltages on test record Press VERTICAL MENU then press the main menu button Coupling Now press the side menu button Q to toggle it to the 50 Q setting TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 63 Performance Tests CHECK that the Ch2 High readout is 21 0 volt and that the Ch2 Low readout lt 0 25 volts Enter high and low voltages on the test record
23. 11003 NC A18 Main Converter Control Board A19 Power Factor Control Board P6 J2 Main LV Power Supply Board Figure 9 1 Interconnections 9 2 77 J100 100 1500 Ot r D Analog J5 l 10 40 Qa Digital CH Power A A m s Video J2 Trigger Board Option 05 J4 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Diagrams SIGNAL OUTPUT a Hz AUX e TRIGGER oO INPUT 77 MAIN ex TRIGGER Yy OUTPUT 77 DELAYED COO RIGGER 9 OUTPUT e A11 DRAM xb Processor 26 GPIB IEEE j 5 STD 488 ud PORT n 15 15 PIN VGA ANALOG OUTPUT 20 Cartridge Console A23 Serpar Service Port Board 20 pi CENTRONICS COMPATIBLE A30 Displa Board CRT Anode 100 NC jn Vert Yoke NC 16 A32 Video 390 j150 m Board iso Floppy 2 J60 rs 500 1 6 Driver 400 Mx 1000 280 500 3 Analog Power 150 500 4 300 500 5 Digital P ower J90 555 100 350 2 Horiz Yoke nn ae A31 Shutter 2 Driver J85 J560 50 12 Figure 9 1 Interconnections Cont TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 9 3 Diagrams A10 Acquisition CH1 G 4 77 2 77 CH3 Attenuator 77 CH4
24. Brief Procedures c The horizontal POSITION knob positions the signal left and right on screen when rotated 3 Remove the test hookup Disconnect the probe from the channel input and the probe compensation terminals Verify the Main and Equipment Delayed Trigger Systems required Prerequisites One probe such as the P 6243 P6245 P6139A or P6339A None 1 Install the test hookup and preset the oscilloscope controls a Hook up the signal source Install the probe on CH 1 Connect the probe tip to PROBE COMPENSATION SIGNAL on the front panel connect the probe ground to PROBE COMPENSATION GND See Figure 4 3 on page 4 8 b Initialize the oscilloscope Press save recall SETUP m Press the main menu button Recall Factory Setup m Press the side menu button OK Confirm Factory Init c Modify default settings m Set the vertical SCALE to 200 mV m Set the horizontal SCALE for the M main time base to 200 us m Press SET LEVEL TO 50 m Press TRIGGER MENU m Press the main menu button Mode amp Holdoff Press the side menu button Normal m Press CLEAR MENU to remove the menus from the screen 2 Verify that the main trigger system operates Confirm that the following statements are true W The trigger level readout for the main trigger system changes with the trigger LEVEL knob m The trigger LEVEL knob can trigger and untrigger the square wave signal as you rotate it Leave the signal untriggered which i
25. Foot Removal g Su Figure 6 9 Cabinet modules removal TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 27 Removal and Installation Procedures Procedures for Outer Chassis Modules You should have completed the Access Procedure page 6 15 before doing any procedure in this collection The procedures found here listed in order presented 6 28 Fan A14 D1 Bus and Analog Power and Digital Power Cables follow m Fan Wm A14D1 Bus and Analog Power and Digital Power Cables m 23 SerPar Board m 29 Video Trigger Board All Processor Display Board m Hard Disk Drive m Cover and Board Brackets m Rear Panel Cables m A10 Acquisition Board m Floppy Disk Drive m Rear Chassis Assemble equipment and locate module to be removed Have handy a screwdriver with a size T 20 Torx tip Items 1 and 3 Locate the fan in the locator diagram Outer Chassis Modules Figure 6 2 page 6 13 Orient the oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the work surface and its left side is facing you Disconnect the fan from processor display board Unplug the fan s power cable from J20 Remove the fan Remove the two screws securing the fan to the main chassis and lift the fan away from the chassis Reinstallation Do in reverse order substeps 3 and 4 reversing the removal instructions in each substep to reinstall the assembly See the procedure Rear Cover and Cabinet page 6 18 to complete reasse
26. Set vertical SCALE to 100 mV Press SET LEVEL TO 50 Press MEASURE then press the main menu button Select Measrmnt for Ch2 Repeatedly press the side menu button more until Pk Pk appears in the side menu its icon is shown at the left Press the side menu button Pk Pk Press CLEAR MENU b Check against limits Skip the first four subparts of this substep for the TDS 794D only CHECK that the readout Ch2 Pk Pk is between 80 mV and 120 mV inclusive for the TDS 600B or is between 88 mV and 132 mV inclusive for the TDS 500D 700D Enter voltage on test record Press VERTICAL MENU then press the side menu button Q to toggle to the 50 Q setting Press CLEAR MENU CHECK that the readout Ch2 Pk Pk is between 40 mV and 60 mV inclusive for the TDS 600B or is between 44 mV and 66 mV inclusive for the TDS 500D 700D Enter voltage on test record 4 Disconnect the hookup Disconnect the cables from the channel inputs and the rear panel outputs TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 65 Performance Tests Check Probe Equipment Compensator Output required One female BNC to clip adapter Item 3 Two dual banana connectors Item 6 One BNC T connector Item 7 Two precision 50 O coaxial cables Item 5 One DC calibration generator Item 9 Prerequisites See page 4 15 Also the oscilloscope must have passed Check Accuracy For Long Term Sample Rate Delay Time and Delta Time Measuremen
27. COICOICOICOICO Figure 4 2 Verifying adjustments and signal path compensation 2 Return to regular service Press CLEAR MENU to exit the system menus TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Brief Procedures Functional Tests The purpose of these procedures is to confirm that the oscilloscope functions properly The only equipment required is one of the standard accessory probes and to check the file system a 3 5 inch 720 K or 1 44 Mbyte floppy disk oscilloscope provide an extremely low loading capacitance 1 pF to ensure the best possible signal reproduction These probes should not be used to measure signals exceeding 8 volts or errors in signal measurement will be observed Above 40 volts damage to the probe may result To make measurements beyond 10 volts use either the P6139A probe good to 500 volts peak the P6339A probe for the TDS 794D or refer to the catalog for a recommended probe T CAUTION The P6217 P6243 and P6245 probes that can be used with this STOP These procedures verify functions that is they verify that the oscilloscope features operate They do not verify that they operate within limits Therefore when the instructions in the functional tests that follow call for you to verify that a signal appears on screen that is about five divisions in amplitude or has a period of about six horizontal divisions etc do NOT interpret the quantities given as limits Operation
28. Tek Run 250kS 5 Average d Select Measurement Check output elect i THigh ow Remove Gating Reference Measrmnt Setup Snapshot for Ch2 Measrmnt OFF Histogram Levels 4of7 1 00 200us Chi amv C Figure 4 21 Measurement of main trigger out limits d Check Delayed Trigger output against limits See Figure 4 21 4 64 Move the precision 50 Q cable from the rear panel Main Trigger Output BNC to the rear panel Delayed Trigger Output BNC CHECK that the Ch2 High readout is 21 0 volt and that the Ch2 Low readout lt 0 25 volts Enter high and low voltages on test record Press the side menu button Q to select the 1 MQ setting This step is not required on the TDS 794D proceed to step 3 Press CLEAR MENU CHECK that the Ch2 High readout is 22 5 volts and that the Ch2 Low readout is lt 0 7 volts Enter high and low voltages on test record TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests 3 Confirm CH 3 AUX I on some TDS models output is within limits for gain a Measure gain Move the precision 50 Q cable from the rear panel DELAYED TRIGGER OUTPUT BNC to the rear panel CH 3 AUX 1 BNC SIGNAL OUT on some models Push TRIGGER MENU Press the main menu button Source Press the side menu button Ch3 Ax1 on some TDS models
29. The on board batteries of the memory modules have a shelf life of about five years Partial or total loss of stored settings upon power on may indicate that the memory modules need to be replaced Operating Environment The following environmental requirements are provided to ensure proper operation and long instrument life Operating Temperature Operate oscilloscopes where the ambient air temperature is from 4 C to 45 C 4 50 C for the TDS 500D and 700D with no diskette in the floppy drive Store the oscilloscopes in ambient temperatures from 22 C to 60 C with no diskette in the floppy drive After storage at temperatures outside the operating limits allow the chassis to stabilize at a safe operating temperature before applying power Ventilation Requirements The oscilloscopes are cooled by air drawn in and exhausted through their cabinet side panels by an internal fan To ensure proper cooling of the oscilloscope allow at least two inches clearance on both sides and 3 4 inch on the bottom of the oscilloscope The feet on the bottom of the oscilloscope provide the required clearance when set on flat surfaces The top of the oscilloscope does not require ventilation clearance CAUTION If air flow is restricted the digitizing oscilloscope s power supply may temporarily shut down TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 2 3 Installation Applying and Interrupting Power 2 4 Power On Power Off
30. m A14 DI Bus and Analog Power and Digital Power Cables page 6 28 m Display Frame Assembly m Front Cover Trim Ring Menu Buttons and Attenuator Panel page 6 22 m Rear Cover and Cabinet page 6 18 completes reassembly Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed Have handy a screwdriver with a size T 15 Torx 9 tip Items 1 and 2 Do the procedure A30 Display Assembly and Supply Fuse page 6 48 Do not remove the display driver board Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram Inner Chassis Modules Figure 6 2 page 6 13 Orient the oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope so its rear is down on the work surface and its bottom is facing you Remove the front subpanel Remove the six screws securing the front subpanel to the main chassis See Figure 6 24 for screw locations Lift the front subpanel up away from the main chassis to complete the removal Reinstallation Do the following substeps to reinstall the front subpanel and reassemble the remainder of the oscilloscope a Align the front subpanel to the main chassis taking care to ensure that the main chassis slips into its alignment slot on the front subpanel see magnified view Figure 6 24 Then reinstall the six screws removed in step 3 See the procedure A30 Display Assembly and Supply Fuse page 6 48 to reinstall the display frame assembly and display tube See the following procedures in the order listed for instruction
31. 3 Let the oscilloscope warm up Allow a 20 minute warm up period before you begin step 4 4 Start the adjustment software a Change drives to your hard drive typically b Change directories to TDS600B ADJ for any TDS 600B oscilloscope or TDS700D ADJ for any TDS 500D or 700D oscilloscope c Type ADJ600B for any TDS 600B oscilloscope or type ADJ700D for any TDS 500D or 700D oscilloscope NOTE If you are adjusting an Option 3C or 4C equipped oscilloscope read the RELEASE NTS file and refer to Figure 4 43 on 4 93 to set up the equipment d Follow the instructions as prompted on your computer screen This will include the actions listed in step 5 shown below 5 Enable the adjustment constants to be written when prompted on your computer screen in step 4 above 5 8 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Adjustment Procedures a Locate the two small access holes on the right side of the oscilloscope cabinet near the front b Insert the adjustment tool Item 4 in the hole nearest the front of the oscilloscope about 1 2 inch to engage the rocker switch c Pushto rock the switch to its unprotected enabled position See Figure 5 1 Unprotected Protected SO S 3 Figure 5 1 Accessing the protection switch 6 When adjustment has been completed CAUTION Be sure to disable the NVRAM Protection switch as instructed below to protect the adjustment constants again
32. 4 68 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests Dual banana T dad BNC adapters Figure 4 24 Connect the Sense output of the generator through a second dual banana connector followed by a 50 Q precision coaxial cable to the other side of the BNC T connector Now connect the BNC T connector to CH 1 See Figure 4 24 Oscilloscope DC Calibrator BNCT connector 50 O coaxial cables Subsequent test hookup e Measure amplitude of the probe compensation signal Press SHIFT then press ACQUIRE MENU Press the side menu button AVERAGE then enter 16 using the keypad or the general purpose knob Adjust the output of the DC calibration generator until it precisely overlaps the top upper level of the stored probe compensation signal This value will be near 500 mV Record the setting of the DC generator Adjust the output of the DC calibration generator until it precisely overlaps the base lower level of the stored probe compensation signal This value will be near zero volts Record the setting of the DC generator f Press CLEAR MENU to remove the menus from the display See Figure 4 25 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 69 Performance Tests Tek Run 250kS s Average OIOOIOIO io mv M 200gs Chi
33. 77 29 Video Triggers Trigger Option 05 A D Converters A12 FrontPanel 25 Front Panel ON STBY Menu Switches ON STBY Switches Front Panel PF LEDS Front Panel Pots SIGNAL 34 Probe GND Compensation Low Voltage Power Supply Power to All Circuits Floppy 26 Driver A17 Main LV Power Supply A18 Main Converter Control A19 Power Factor Control Figure 9 2 Block Diagram 9 4 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Diagrams SIGNAL OUTPUT e 77 AUX TRIGGER e D INPUT 77 MAIN Oo TRIGGER OUTPUT 77 DELAYED Q Oo TRIGGER OUTPUT A27 A11 DRAM Processor 77 Connector Display 26 pis Option 05 PORT 15 15 PIN VGA ANALOG OUTPUT Processor System A23 P COMPATIBLE A30 Display Driver CRT Anode Vert Yoke A32 Video VIDEO E LR e Display V1000 System HSYNC 2 Horiz Yoke A31 Shutter FSYNC Driver VIDEO sex o gt LCS CLK J560 00 Figure 9 2 Block Diagram Cont TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 9 5 Diagrams 9 6 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual E 1 Mech
34. A Consider the following information when you power on or power off the instrument or when power is interrupted due to an external power failure Upon power on the oscilloscope runs a power on self check If it passes the oscilloscope displays a passed status message and a prompt to press CLEAR MENU to continue If it fails the oscilloscope displays a diagnostic log that identifies the area s that failed and a prompt to press CLEAR MENU to continue See Section 6 Maintenance for information on diagnostics and fault isolation CAUTION DO NOT power off the oscilloscope when either running a signal path compensation or when doing any of the adjustments described in Section 5 Adjustment Procedures 7o do so might result in the loss of internally stored adjustment constants In general do not power off the instrument when doing operations that affect the data types listed in Table 1 1 Wait for the instrument to finish the operation when doing adjustments saving waveforms or saving setups Improper power off or unexpected loss of power to the oscilloscope can result in the following corruptions of nonvolatile RAM NVRAM The following table describes the messages displayed when power is restored after an abnormal power off Table 2 3 Effects of corrupted data Corrupted Data Type Results Adjustment Constants Signal Path Compensation A signal path compensation is required Voltage Reference A voltage reference a
35. Disconnect the hookup Disconnect the cable from the generator output at the input connectors of the channels TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 45 Performance Tests Time Base System Checks Check Accuracy for Long Term Sample Rate 4 46 and Delay Time These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the Main and Delayed time base system and are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in Specifications Equipment One time mark generator Item 11 or required Sine wave generator Item 14 One 50 precision coaxial cable Item 5 Prerequisites See page 4 15 Time Mark or Sine Wave Generator Oscilloscope Output 50 coaxial cable Figure 4 12 Initial test hookup 1 Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls a Hook up the test signal source Connect through a 50 Q precision coaxial cable the output of the generator to CH 1 m If using a time mark generator set the output for 10 ms markers m If using a sine wave generator set the output for 1 2 V and 500 kHz b Initialize the oscilloscope c W Press save recall SETUP Press the main menu button Recall Factory Setup Press the side menu button OK Confirm Factory Init Modify the initialized front panel control settings m Set the vertical SCALE to 200 mV or 500 mV with the optional Tektronix TG 501A Time Mark Generator m Set the horizontal SCALE of the Main time b
36. Main and Delayed Trigger Two precision 50 Q coaxial cables Item 5 One calibration generator Item 10 Prerequisites See page 4 15 Also the oscilloscope must have passed Check DC Voltage Measurement Accuracy on page 4 32 See Input Channels vs Model on page 4 2 1 Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls Calibration To MAIN Generator TRIGGER OUT Oscilloscope 50 coaxial cables Figure 4 20 Initial test hookup a Hook up test signal source 1 m Connect the standard amplitude output of a calibration generator through a 50 Q precision coaxial cable to CH AUXI on some TDS models m Set the output of the calibration generator to 0 500 V b Hook up test signal source 2 Connect the Main Trigger Out at the rear panel to CH 2 through a 50 2 precision cable c Initialize the oscilloscope Press save recall SETUP Press the main menu button Recall Factory Setup Press the side menu button OK Confirm Factory Init 4 62 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests d Modify the initialized front panel control settings Press WAVEFORM OFF to turn off CH 1 Press CH 3 AUX 1 on some TDS models to display that channel If necessary adjust the calibration generator output for 5 divisions of amplitude With the 50 input of the TDS 794D you may need to double the output of the generator to get 5 divisions of amplitude
37. Press TRIGGER MENU b Press the main menu Type pop up until you select Video c Press the main menu Standard pop up until you select 625 PAL d Press the main menu Line e Usethe keypad to set the line number to 7 press 7 then ENTER f Press VERTICAL MENU g Press the main menu Bandwidth TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 71 Performance Tests 4 72 h Select 250 MHz from the side menu Press the main menu Fine Scale j Use the keypad to set the fine scale to 282 mV press 282 SHIFT m then ENTER k Pres HORIZONTAL MENU l Press the main menu Horiz Scale m Use the keypad to set the horizontal scale to 200 ns press 200 SHIFT n then ENTER 3 Check Jitter vs Signal Amplitude a Setup equipment for Jitter Test See Figure 4 26 m Connect one of the rear panel composite outputs marked COMPST on the TSG121 through a 75 Q cable and a 75 Q terminator to the CHI input of the oscilloscope Press the 100 FIELD control the fourth TSG121 front panel button from the left of the PAL signal source PAL Signal Source Oscilloscope COMPST 75 Q terminator 75 Q cable Figure 4 26 Jitter test hookup b CHECK that the oscilloscope lights up its front panel TRIG D LED and it displays the waveform on screen See Figure 4 27 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests Tek Run 250MS s Sample Main Scale 200ns Horiz
38. The TDS 700D Adjustment Software works with both the TDS 500D and the TDS 700D oscilloscopes m The TDS 600B and the TDS 700D Adjustment Software included with this manual The material found in the subsections listed above should be read before using the adjustment software W A written procedure for manually adjusting the optional P6139A probe W A written procedure for manually adjusting the display assembly This procedure is used to return the oscilloscope to conformance with its Warranted Characteristics as listed in Section 1 Specifications It can also be used to optimize the performance of the oscilloscope As a general rule these adjustments should be done every 2000 hours of operation or once a year if the oscilloscope is used infrequently Requirements for Performance Personnel Warm Up Period Before you do this procedure you need to address the following requirements This procedure is only to be performed by trained service technicians This oscilloscope requires a 20 minute warm up time in a 20 C to 30 C environment before it is adjusted Adjustments done before the operating temperature has stabilized may cause errors in performance TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 5 1 Adjustment Procedures Access System Optional Peripherals Usage Test Equipment Performing the Adjustments Except when adjusting the display assembly the cabinet is not removed Instead you enable the int
39. and be sure the vertical scale factor is kept at 1 0X and the horizontal scale factor is 2 0X Save a CH 2 waveform Press CH 2 Be sure the vertical scale factor is kept at 1 0X Then press save recall WAVEFORM Now press the main menu button Save Wfm then press the side menu button To Ref 2 Save CH 3 on some TDS models waveform m Move the coupler from CH 2 to CH 3 AUXI on some TDS models so that CH 1 and CH 3 are driven Press WAVEFORM OFF Press CH 3 Be sure the vertical scale factor is kept at 1 0X Then press the side menu button To Ref 3 Display all test signals m Press WAVEFORM OFF to remove CH 3 AXI on some TDS models from the display m Display the live waveform Move the coupler from CH 3 to CH 4 so that CH 1 and CH 4 are driven Use AUX1 and AUX2 instead of CH3 and CH4 if your TDS model is so equipped Press CH 4 to display Be sure the vertical scale factor is kept at 1 0X See Figure 4 11 on page 4 44 m Display the reference waveforms To do this press the front panel button MORE Press the main menu buttons Ref 2 and Ref 3 You may notice their overlapping ground reference indicators See Figure 4 11 on page 4 44 Measure the test signal Locate the time reference points for these waveforms Do this by first identifying the point where the rising edge of the left most waveform crosses the center horizontal graticule line Next note the corresponding time reference point for the rig
40. b Set the trigger mode Press TRIGGER MENU Now press the main menu button Mode amp Holdoff then press the side menu button Normal Set upper and lower limits that ensure triggering See Figure 4 15 Press the main menu button Type then repeatedly press the same button until Pulse is highlighted in the menu that pops up Press the main menu button Class then repeatedly press the same button until Width is highlighted in the menu that pops up Press the main menu button Trig When then press the side menu button Within Limits Press the side menu button Upper Limit Use the keyboard to set the upper limit to 10 ns press 10 then SHIFT then n and ENTER m Press the side menu button Lower Limit Use the keypad to set the lower limit to 2 ns d Change limits until triggering stops m Press SET LEVEL TO 50 m While doing the following subparts monitor the display it will stop acquiring and the front panel light TRIG it will extinguish to determine when triggering is lost 4 50 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests W Press the side menu button Lower Limit m Use the general purpose knob to increase the Lower Limit readout until triggering is lost m CHECK that the Lower Limit readout after the oscilloscope loses triggering is within 3 5 ns to 6 5 ns inclusive W Enter time on test record m Use the keypad to return the Lower Limit to 2 ns and reestablish tr
41. i G Figure 4 40 Sync duty cycle test critically adjusted pulse Press TRIGGER MENU Press the main menu Type pop up until you select Video If the TRIG D LED is not lighted check that the Width and CHI Period measurements are adjusted correctly See note above CONFIRM that the setup is correct and the oscilloscope will trigger CONFIRM that the TRIG D LED is lighted and the waveform is stable Disconnect the signal source from CH1 wait a few seconds then reconnect the signal CONFIRM that the TRIG D LED is lighted and the waveform is stable Press Sync Polarity Press Pos Sync Push the pulse generator COMPLEMENT button out CONFIRM that the TRIG D LED is lighted and the waveform is stable TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests m Disconnect the signal source from CH1 wait a few seconds then reconnect the signal m CONFIRM that the TRIG D LED is lighted and the waveform is stable m Disconnect all test equipment from the oscilloscope m Press save recall SETUP the main menu button Recall Factory Setup and the side menu OK Confirm Factory Init TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 87 Performance Tests Sine Wave Generator Leveling Procedure 4 88 Some procedures in this manual require a sine wave generator to produce the necessary test signals If you do
42. lt 15V lt 0 5 lt 0 2 lt 0 1 101 mV div 1 V div 33 V 1 096 lt 0 5 lt 0 2 1 The limits given are for the ambient temperature range of 0 C to 30 C Reduce the upper bandwidth frequencies by 5 MHz for the TDS 600B or by 2 5 MHz for the TDS 500D 700D for each C above 30 C The numbers given are valid 0 C to 30 C and will increase as the temperature increases due to the degradation in bandwidth Rise time is calculated from the bandwidth It is defined by the following formula 450 x 400 TDS 600B Rise Time ns BW MHS TDS 500D 700D Rise Time ns BW Note that if you measure rise time you must take into account the rise time of the test equipment signal source etc that you use to provide the test signal That is the measured rise time RT is determined by the instrument rise time RT and the rise time of the test signal source RTgen according to the following formula BI 5 AT RES The values given are the maximum absolute difference between the value at the end of a specified time interval after the midlevel crossing of the step and the value one second after the midlevel crossing of the step expressed as a percentage of the step amplitude Table 1 17 Typical characteristics Triggering system Name Description Accuracy Trigger Level or Threshold DC Trigger source Accuracy Coupled wm Any Channel 2 x Setting Net Offset for s
43. ov Che j Fine Scale Fine Scale 1 rag Cal Probe initialized C D CoD Co C gt Figure 4 34 60 Hz Rejection test result TDS 684B shown 6 Check Line Count Accuracy a Set up oscilloscope for Line Count Accuracy Test Press WAVEFORM OFF Press CH1 Press HORIZONTAL MENU Press the main menu Record Length COICOICOICOICO Press the side menu more until you see the appropriate menu Press the side menu 5000 points in 100divs Press the main menu Horiz Scale div Use the keypad to set the horizontal scale to 200 ns press 200 SHIFT n then ENTER b Check Line Count Accuracy m Connect a composite output signal from the rear of the PAL signal source labeled COMPST on the TSG 121 to the CH1 input through a 75 Q cable and a 75 terminator See Figure 4 35 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 79 Performance Tests PAL signal source Oscilloscope joo C 0 0 75 Q cable 75 Q terminator Figure 4 35 Line count accuracy test hookup 4 80 Press the main menu Trigger Position Press the side menu to Set to 50 Press the main menu to Horiz Pos Press the side menu to Set to 50 Use the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob to move the falling edge of the sync pulse to two divisions to the left of center screen See Fig
44. wave generator does not have automatic output amplitude leveling c Hook up the test signal source Connect the sine wave output of a leveled sine wave generator to CH 1 Set the output of the generator to a reference frequency of 10 MHz or less See Figure 4 7 For the optional setup using a leveled sine wave generator with a leveling head see Figure 4 8 and if using this optional setup with the example Tektronix SG 504 set the generator output to 6 MHz Sine Wave Generator Oscilloscope Output Figure 4 7 Initial test hookup High Frequency Sine Wave Generator Oscilloscope Output Leveling head Figure 4 8 Optional initial test hookup TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 37 Performance Tests 2 Confirm the input channels are within limits for analog bandwidth Do the following substeps test CH 1 first skipping substeps a and b since CH 1 is already set up for testing from step 1 a Select an unchecked channel m Press WAVEFORM OFF to remove the channel just confirmed from display Press the front panel button that corresponds to the channel you are to confirm m Move the leveling output of the sine wave generator to the channel you selected b Match the trigger source to the channel selected m Press TRIGGER MENU Press the main menu button Source then press the side menu button that corresponds to the channel s
45. 01 V Vert scale setting 18 899 V 17 102 V 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH2 5 mV Vert scale setting E10329V7 cc aa 1 0471 V 5 Div position setting 1 V offset CH2 5 mV Vert scale setting 1 0471V 0 fe 1 0329 V 5 Div position setting 1 V offset CH2 200 mV Vert scale setting 11 4165 V 11 7835 V 5 Div position setti ng 10 V offset 4 18 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests TDS 600B Test Record cont Instrument Serial Number Certificate Number Temperature RH Date of Calibration Technician TDS 600B Performance Test Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum CH2 200 mV Vert scale setting 11 7835 V 11 4165 V 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH2 1 01 V Vert scale setting 17 102 V 18 899 V 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH2 1 01 V Vert scale setting 18 899 V 17102V 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH3 5 mV Vert scale setting 1 0329 V 1 0471V orAX1 5 Div position setting 1 V offset CH3 5 mV Vert scale setting 1 0471 V 1 0329 V orAX1 5 Div position setting 1 V offset CH3 200 mV Vert scale setting 11 4165 V 11 7835 V orAX1 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH3 200 mV Vert scale setting 11 7835 V 11 4165 V orAX1 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH3 1 01 V Vert scale setting 17 102 V 18 899 V orAX1
46. 1 20 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Warranted Characteristics Table 1 10 Warranted characteristics Signal acquisition system cont Name Analog Bandwidth DC 50 Coupled and Bandwidth selection is FULL TDS 500D 700D Description TDS 520D 540D TDS 580D amp 724D amp 754D TDS 784D Volts Div Bandwidth2 Bandwidth2 10 mV div 1 V div DC 500 MHz DC 1 GHz 5 mV div 9 95 mV div DC 500 MHz DC 750 MHz 2 mV div 4 98 mV div DC 500 MHz DC 600 MHz 1 mV div 1 99 mV div DC 450 MHz DC 500 MHz TDS 794D Volts Div Bandwidth2 10 mV div 1 V div DC 2 GHz Crosstalk Channel Isolation 2100 1 at 100 MHz and gt 30 1 at the rated bandwidth for the channel s Volt Div setting for any two channels having equal Volts Div settings Delay Between Channels Full Bandwidth TDS 600B lt 100 ps for any two channels with equal Volts Div and Coupling settings and both channels deskew values set to 0 TDS 500D 700D lt 50 ps for any two channels with equal Volts Div and Coupling settings and both channel deskew values set to 0 0 us Input Impedance DC 1 MQ Coupled Input Impedance DC 50 Coupled Input Impedance DC 50 Coupled TDS 794D Input Voltage Maximum DC 1 MQ AC 1MQ or GND Coupled DC 50 Q or GND Coupled TDS 794D only Input Voltage Maximum DC 50 or AC 50 Q Coupled Input Voltage Maximum DC 50 O Coupled TDS 794D 1 MQ 0 5 in paralle
47. 1 MQ Sensitivity Range 50 O Sensitivity as a voltage a DL is equal to 1 25 of a division times the volts division setting Volts Div setting 1 mV div 100 mV div 101 mV div 1 V div 1 01 V div 10 V div 10 mV div 50 mV div 50 5 mV div 99 5 mV div 100 mV div 500 mV div 500 mV div 1 V div 5 divisions 1 mV div to 10 V div Offset range Hv 10 V 100 V 0 50 V 0 25 V 5 V 2 5 V 1 mV div to 1 V div2 10 mV div 1V div on TDS 794D 1 Displayed vertically with 25 digitization levels DLs per division and 10 24 divisions dynamic range with zoom off A DL is the smallest voltage level change of the oscilloscope input that can be resolved by the 8 bit A D Converter Expressed 2 The sensitivity ranges from 1 mV div to 10 V div for 1 MQ or to 1 V div for 50 Q in a 1 2 5 sequence of coarse settings with Fit to Screen off Between coarse settings the sensitivity can be finely adjusted with a resolution equal to 196 of the more sensitive coarse setting For example between 50 mV div and 100 mV div the volts division can be set with 0 5 mV resolution 3 1MQnotavailable on TDS 7940 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 1 11 Nominal Traits Table 1 4 Nominal traits Time base system Name Description Range Sample R ate TDS 684B 5 Samples sec to 5 GSamples sec on four channels simultaneously TDS 680B 5 Samples sec to 5 GSamples sec on two channels simultaneously TDS 644B 5 Sa
48. 1 at 425 V and J 27 Yes Y J18 pins 1 and 2 on the All DRAM Processor Display module see Figure 6 36 have signals similar to Figure 6 31 Replace the A30 Display Assembly No pin 17 at 45 1 V See Figure 6 36 Perform the Low Voltage Power Supply troubleshooting procedure Figure 6 30 Color display troubleshooting procedure TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual z Y Replace the All DRAM Processor Display module 6 65 Troubleshooting 10 0MS 5 8 Acqs 18 pin 1 Horizontal Sync J 18 pin 2 Vertical Sync tht E00 BE rov 5 00us Ch2X i3 Figure 6 31 Horizontal and vertical sync signals color display 25 0MS s 835 Acqs Mud NAR eM LIRE i WR deo Nemes J 62 pin 1 Video Black Levels ches Blanking lc NE AE puo BE tomy Wzo0gs Chi 7 524mV Figure 6 32 A video signal with white black and blanking levels color display 6 66 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Troubleshooting This procedure helps you determine whether the A10 Acquisition or the All DRAM Processor Display module is bad Replace the A14 D1 Bus module Be sure you connectthe A14 D1 Bus module correctly the silk screen on the module will help you correctly orient the module Select the extended diagnostics menu and run all
49. 160 000 divs 10 divs TDS 784D amp TDS 794D One channel only 1 Fit to Screen setting Fitto Screen off preserves 50 samples division in a 1 2 5 sec division sequence 3 Fit to Screen on lets the samples division and the sec division sequence vary All channels means all that may be displayed at one time four channels for some models two for others See Table 1 1 and its footnote Trigger System The triggering system supports a varied set of features for triggering the signal acquisition system Trigger signals recognized include m Edge main and delayed trigger systems This familiar type of triggering is fully configurable for source slope coupling mode auto or normal and holdoff Logic main trigger system This type of triggering can be based on pattern asynchronous or state synchronous In either case logic triggering is configurable for sources for Boolean operators to apply to those sources for logic pattern or state on which to trigger for mode auto or normal and for holdoff Time qualification may be selected in pattern mode Another class of logic trigger setup hold triggers when data in one trigger source changes state within the setup and hold times that you specify relative to a clock in another trigger source m Pulse main trigger system Pulse triggering is configurable for triggering on runt or glitch pulses or on pulse widths or periods inside or outside limits TDS 500D TDS 600B a
50. 3877 00 Qty amp description 6 SCR ASSEM WSHR 8 32 X 0 500 PNH STL T 20 FAN DC TUBEAXIAL ASSY 24V 5W 1600 RPM CA ASSY DISCRETE LDI 2 22AWG 7 0L 1X2 CIRCUIT BD ASSY COLOR PROCESSOR DISPLAY A11 TDS 644B 684B 724D 754D 784D 794D CIRCUIT BD ASSY MONO PROCESSOR DISPLAY A11 TDS 520D 540D 580D CIRCUIT BD ASSY MONO PROCESSOR DISPLAY A11 TDS 620B 680B CHASSIS SCOPE REAR MARKER IDENT MKD W CONN IDENT REARBNC CONN RF JACK BNC PNL 50 OHM FEMALE CIRCUIT BD ASSY RS232 CENTRONIC OPTION 13 ON TDS 520D 540D 620B amp 680B BRACKET CKT BD PLASTIC REAR PLATE REAR ALUMINUM RS232 CENTRONIC OPTION 13 PLATE REAR STANDARD WITHOUT OPTION 13 CONN HARDWARE DSUB J ACK SCREW OPTION 13 ON TDS 520D 540D 620B amp 680B SHLD GSKT ELEK 3 165 L CLIP ON SCR ASSEM WSHR 6 32 X 0 375 PNH STL T 15 DISK DRIVE PCMCIA OPTIONAL ON TDS 500D 700D RETAINER BRACKET PCMCIA BD OPTIONAL ON TDS 500D 700D CIRCUIT BD ASSY D1 BUS A14 CIRCUIT BD ASSY D1 BUS A14 0PT 05 CIRCUIT BD ASSY ACQUISITION SHORT TDS 540D amp 754D CIRCUIT BD ASSY ACQUISITION LONG TDS 540D amp 754D CIRCUIT BD ASSY ACQUISITION SHORT OPT 1G CIRCUIT BD ASSY ACQUISITION LONG OPT 1G CIRCUIT BD ASSY ACQUISITION SHORT TDS 520D amp 724D CIRCUIT BD ASSY ACQUISITION LONG TDS 520D amp 724D CIRCUIT BD ACQUISITION TDS620B 644B CIRCUIT BD ACQUISITION TDS 680B 684B A10 CIRCUIT BD ASSY ACQUISITION SHORT TDS580D amp
51. 5Div position setting 10 V offset CH3 1 01 V Vert scale setting 18 899 V 17102V orAX1 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH4 5 mV Vert scale setting 1 0329 V 1 0471V orAX2 5 Div position setting 1 V offset CH4 5 mV Vert scale setting 1 0471 V 1 0329 V orAX2 5 Div position setting 1 V offset CH4 200 mV Vert scale setting 11 4165 V 11 7835 V orAX2 5Div position setting 10 V offset CH4 200 mV Vert scale setting 11 7835 V 11 4165 V orAX2 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH4 1 01 V Vert scale setting 17 102 V 18 899 V orAX2 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH4 1 01 V Vert scale setting 18 899 V 17 102 V orAX2 5 Div position setting 10 V offset Analog Bandwidth CH1 100 mV 44mV 5 5 LLL N A CH2 100 mV 44mV 2 2 5 LLL N A CH3 100 mV 44mV po 25 LLL N A orAX1 CH4 100 mV 44mV 2 ___ N A orAX2 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 19 Performance Tests TDS 600B Test Record cont Instrument Serial Number Temperature Date of Calibration TDS 600B Performance Test Delay Between Channels Delay Between Channels Time Base System Long Term Sample Rate Delay Time 500 ns 10 ms Trigger System Accuracy Pulse Glitch or P ulse Width Hor scale lt 1 us Certificate Number RH 96 Technician Minimum e Incoming Outgoing Maximum N A p c JE HP Lower Lim
52. 6 Nominal traits Display system Description Video Display 7 inch diagonal with a display area of 5 04 inches horizontally by 3 78 inches vertically TDS 520D 540D 580D 620B and 680B Monochrome display TDS 644B 684B 724D 754D 784D and 794D Color display Video Display Resolution 640 pixels horizontally by 480 pixels vertically TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 1 15 Nominal Traits Table 1 6 Nominal traits Display system cont Name Description Waveform Display Graticule Single Graticule 401 x 501 pixels 8 x 10 divisions where divisions are 1 cm by 1 cm Waveform Display Levels Colors TDS 520D 540D 580D 620B and 680B Sixteen levels in infinite persistence or variable persistence display TDS 644B 684B 724D 754D 784D and 794D Sixteen colors in infinite persistence or variable persistence display Table 1 7 Nominal traits GPIB interface output ports and power fuse Name Description Interface GPIB GPIB interface complies with IEEE Std 488 1987 Interface RS 232 RS 232 interface complies with EIA TIA 574 talk only Optional on the TDS 520D 540D 580D 620B and 680B Interface Centronics Centronics interface complies with Centronics interface standard C332 44 Feb 1977 REV A Optional on the TDS 520D 540D 580D 620B and 680B Interface Video VGA video output with levels that comply with EIA RS 343A standard DB 15 connector Logic Polarity for Main and Dela
53. 7 242mV 28 Feb 1994 Ref1 100mv 200 11 39 36 COCOSICOICOICOICIC Figure 4 25 Measurement of probe compensator amplitude g Check against limits m Subtract the value just obtained base level from that obtained previously top level m CHECK that the difference obtained is within 495 mV to 505 mV inclusive m Enter voltage difference on test record 3 Disconnect the hookup Disconnect the cable from CH 1 4 70 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests Option 05 Video Trigger Checks Not Available on TDS 794D Check Video Trigger Equipment PAL signal source Item 19 60 Hz sine wave generator Item 20 Pulse generator Item 21 Two 75 cables Item 22 Two 75 terminators Item 23 One BNC T connector Item 7 One precision 50 O coaxial cable Item 5 50 Q terminator Item 4 Prerequisites See page 4 15 These prerequisites include running the signal path compensation routine 1 Setup the oscilloscope to factory defaults by completing the following steps a Press save recall SETUP b Press the main menu Recall Factory Setup c Press the side menu OK Confirm Factory Init d Wait for the Clock Icon to leave the screen e CONFIRM the oscilloscope is setup as shown below Channel CH1 Volt div 100 mV Horizontal scale 500 us div 2 Setup the oscilloscope for TV triggers by completing the following steps a
54. Attenuators Items 1 and 2 Optional One high frequency leveled sine wave generator and its leveling head replaces items 14 15 16 17 and 18 Prerequisites See page 4 15 1 Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls a Initialize the oscilloscope W Press save recall SETUP Press the main menu button Recall Factory Setup then press the side menu button OK Confirm Factory Init b Modify the default settings m Press TRIGGER MENU m Press the main menu button Coupling Then press the side menu button Noise Rej m Turn the horizontal SCALE knob to 50 ns Press SHIFT then press ACQUIRE MENU m Press the main menu button Mode then press the side menu button Average 16 m Press MEASURE Press the main menu button Level Setup then press the side menu button Min Max 4 36 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests NOTE The sine wave generator output amplitude must be leveled to within 0 35 dB of the reference frequency 10 MHz through the bandwidth frequency listed in Table 4 4 The 0 35 dB requirement is necessary to ensure a bandwidth that meets Tektronix specifications You can perform bandwidth PV using an unleveled sine wave generator with amplitude error gt 0 35 dB Under these conditions the bandwidth PV is subject to the flatness errors associated with the generator used Refer to the Sine Wave Generator Leveling Procedure on page 4 88 if your sine
55. Autoset Manual Std Mask Offset Adj ON Enabled Chi 20 00W lt M 250ps Chi 46 0uw Filter 200M Hz risp Mask Position Counting 05 OFF SSS Figure 4 45 Optical impulse response for OC 12 SONET Reference Receiver NOTE In Figure 4 45 the left cursor is at the DC frequency The right cursor is at the OC 12 data rate of 622 MHz 4 MHz Also note that the reference receiver RR designation is beside the 20 uW vertical scale factor f Next move the cursor currently positioned at the beginning of the record until the cursor is just right of the DC spike in the response see Figure 4 46 The unsigned A dB readout should be at or between the upper and lower limits shown in Table 4 12 note that the entries in the table are signed numbers but the A dB readout is not for the mask that is turned on TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests Tek Run 200GS s ET Sample un Mask Options Mask Source Chi Mask Display OFF Std Mask Autoset Manual Std Mask Offset Adj ON Filter Enabled COICOICOICO CO ICOICOICOICOICOICOICO Figure 4 46 Optical impulse response for OC 12 SONET Reference Receiver NOTE In Figure 4 46 the left cursor has been moved to the zero dB lev
56. C to 460 C Relative humidity no disk in floppy drive Operating 20 to 80 ator below 432 upper limit derates to 30 relative humidity at 45 C Nonoperating 5 to 90 ator below 431 C upper limit derates to 20 relative humidity at 60 C Altitude To 4570 m 15 000 ft operating excluding hard disk drive To 3048 m 10 000 ft operating including hard disk drive To 12190 m 40 000 ft nonoperating Dynamics Emissions TDS 5000 7000 1 2 Emissions TDS 600B 1 Random vibration floppy disk not installed 0 31 g rms from 5 to 500 Hz 10 minutes each axis operating 3 07 g rms from 5 to 500 Hz 10 minutes each axis nonoperating Meets or exceeds the requirements of the following standards FCC Code of Federal Regulations 47 CFR Part 15 Subpart B Class A European Community R equirements EN 55011 Class A Radiated Emissions EN 55011 Class A Conducted Emissions EN 50081 1 EN60555 2 Power Line Harmonic Emissions Meets or exceeds the requirements of the following standards FCC Code of Federal Regulations 47 CFR Part 15 SubpartB Class A EN 50081 1 European Community Requirements EN 55022 Radiated Emissions Class EN 55022 Class B Conducted Emissions EN60555 2 Power Line Harmonic Emissions 1 24 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Warranted Characteristics Table 1 14 Warranted characteristics Environmental cont Description Suscepti
57. Knobs Line Fuse and Line Cord EMI Gaskets Rear Cover and Cabinet Front Cover Trim Ring Menu Buttons and Attenuator Panel A12 Front Panel Assembly Display Frame Assembly Cabinet Modules Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed Have an angled tip tweezers Item 9 handy Find the knob s to be removed on the front panel Orient the oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the work surface and its front is facing you Remove the knob s Grasp any knob you want to remove and pull it straight out from the front panel slightly to create some clearance between the base of the knob and the front panel Insert the tweezers between the knob and front panel and use them to remove the knob See Figure 6 4 Reinstallation To reinstall align knob to shaft and push it in until it snaps TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures When reinstalling the knobs note there are three sizes Be sure to reinstall the proper size knob in the proper location Figure 6 4 Knob removal Line Fuse and Line Cord 1 Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed Have a flat bladed screwdriver Item 5 handy Locate the line fuse and line cord in the locator diagram External modules Figure 6 1 2 Orient the oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the work surface and its rear is facing you If you are se
58. Open Closed X b Power off the oscilloscope See Removal and Installation Procedures in Section 6 to reinstall the cabinet and other modules removed in step 1 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 5 25 Adjustment Procedures 5 26 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Maintenance This section contains the information needed to do periodic and corrective maintenance on the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscopes The following subsections are included Preparation Introduction plus general information on preventing damage to internal modules when doing maintenance Inspection and Cleaning Information and procedures for inspecting the oscilloscope and cleaning its external and internal modules Removal and Installation Procedures Procedures for the removal of defective modules and replacement of new or repaired modules Also included is a procedure for disassembly of the oscilloscope for cleaning Troubleshooting Information for isolating failed modules Included are instructions for operating the oscilloscope s internal diagnostic routines and troubleshooting trees Most of the trees make use of these internal diagnostic routines to speed fault isolation to a module Related Maintenance Procedures The following sections contain information and procedures related to mainte nance Section 2 Operating Information covers instructions useful when operating the oscilloscope in
59. P 6245 active probes Option applies only to TDS 684B models 27 Two active probes Add two 1 5 GHz probe only P6245 active probes TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Option applies only to TDS 680B 7 1 Options and Accessories Table 7 1 Options cont Option Label Description 1M 130 000 record length Extend record length from 50 000 samples standard as follows TDS 520D and TDS 724D To 250 000 samples on one channel and 130 000 on two channels TDS 540D TDS 580D TDS 754D TDS 784D and TDS 794D To 500 000 samples on one channel 250 000 on two channels and 130 000 samples on three or four channels Option is only available for the models listed above 2M 8 M acquisition length Extend standard acquisition length as follows TDS 520D and TDS 724D To 2 M samples on two channels and 4 M on one channel TDS 540D TDS 580D TDS 754D TDS 784D amp TDS 794D To 2 M samples on three or four channels 4 M on two channels and 8 M samples on one channel Option includes a hard disk and is only available for the models listed above 1R Rackmount Oscilloscope comes configured for installation in a 19 inch wide instrument rack For later field conversions order kit 016 1236 00 2C Communication Signal Oscilloscope comes configured for communications signal triggering and mask testing Analyzer Option applies to TDS 500D amp TDS 700D only 3C P6701B with system Oscilloscope comes with a P67
60. P6158 P6158 P6158 P6158 Active CMOS TTL P6243 P6245 P6243 P6245 P6243 P6245 P6245 All P6245 P6245 P6245 P6245 P6245 P6245 P6245 Technology P6217 P6217 P6217 P6217 P6217 P6217 P6217 Logic P6408 P6408 P6408 P6408 P6408 P6408 Differential Digital P6246 P6247 P6246 P6247 P6246 P6247 P6247 Telecom P6247 P6247 P6247 Micro Volt ADA400A ADA400A ADA400A ADA400A ADA400A ADA400A High Voltage P5205 P5205 P5205 P5205 P5205 P5205 P5210 P5210 P5210 P5210 P5210 P5210 Current AC Only CT 1 CT 2 Current TCP 202 TCP 202 TCP 202 TCP 202 TCP 202 TCP 202 TCP 202 AC DC AM503S AM503S AM503S AM503S AM503S AM503S AM503S Electro O ptical Converter P6701B P6701B P6701B P6701B P6701B P6701B P6701B P6703B P6703B P6703B P6703B P6703B P6703B P6703B 7 6 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Options and Accessories m P6701B Optical to Electrical Analog Converter 500 to 950 nm DC to 1 GHz 1 V mW m P6703B Optical to Electrical Analog Converter 1100 to 1700 nm DC to 1 2 GHz 1 V mW m P6723 Optical Logic Probe 1310 to 1550 nm 20 to 650 Mb s 8 to 28 dBm m AFTDS Differential Signal Adapter W 75 75 Q to 50 Q Adapter m P6243 Active high speed digital voltage probe FET DC to 1 0 GHz m P6245 Active high speed digital voltage probe FET DC to 1 5 GHz m P6246 Active high bandwidth differential probe FET DC to 400 MHz m P6247 Active high bandwidth differential probe FET DC to 1 GHz m P6101B 15 MHz Passive probe m
61. Press the main menu button Time Base W Press the side menu buttons Delayed Only and Delayed Trigger able m Set D delayed horizontal SCALE to 500 us b Select the Delayed trigger system m Press SHIFT then press the front panel DELAYED TRIG button m Press the main menu button Level c Measure the test signal Press the side menu button SET TO 50 Read the measurement results in the side or main menu below the label Level TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 55 Performance Tests 4 56 d Check against limits Do the following subparts in the order listed m CHECK that the Level readout in the side menu is within the limits listed in Table 4 7 Table 4 7 Delayed trigger level accuracy readout Instrument Maximum TDS 600B 9 863 V 10 137 V TDS 500D 700D 9 8853 V 10 1147 V TDS 794D 4 8953 V 5 1047 V W Enter voltage on test record Press the main menu button Slope then press the side menu button for negative slope See icon at left Press the main menu button Level Repeat substep c m CHECK that the Level readout in the side menu is within the limits listed in Table 4 7 m Enter voltage on test record 4 Disconnect the hookup a First set the output of the DC calibration generator to 0 volts b Disconnect the cable from the generator output at the input connector of CH 1 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests Sensitivity Edge Trigg
62. TDS 500D 600B and 700D oscilloscopes cont TDS 600B TDS 500D amp TDS 700D Floppy disk drive 1 44 Mbyte 3 5 inch DOS 3 3 or later floppy disk drive Internal hard disk drive optional on the TDS 500D and 700D lomega Zip drive compatible Feature Storage NVRAM storage for saving waveforms hardcopies and setups 0 Full GPIB programmability Hardcopy output using GP IB RS 232 or Centronics ports Two plus Two channel operation allows up to two of the four channels to be displayed simultaneously Channels not displayed can be used to couple a triggering signal to the oscilloscope Use a combination of front panel buttons knobs and on screen menus to control the many functions of the oscilloscope The front panel controls are grouped according to function vertical horizontal trigger and special Set a function you adjust often such as vertical positioning or the time base setting directly by its own front panel knob Set a function you change less often such as vertical coupling or horizontal mode indirectly using a selected menu Pressing one sometimes two front panel button s such as vertical menu displays a main menu of related functions such as coupling and bandwidth at the bottom of the screen Pressing a main menu button such as coupling displays a side menu of settings for that function such as AC DC or GND ground coupling at the right side of the screen Pressing a side menu butt
63. XRING TONGUE TERM QIK DISC 0 250 SPADE STUD MT FNT PANEL ASSY TDS 644B TDS684B FNT PANEL ASSY TDS 620B TDS 680B FNT PANEL ASSY TDS520D TDS724D FNT PANEL ASSY TDS540D TDS580D TDS754D TDS784D FNT PANEL ASSY TDS 794D KNOB DIMP LED GPK 1 7 DIA Mfr code TKOIK TK1163 TK1163 80009 80009 80009 TK2469 00779 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 TK1163 Mfr part number ORDER BY DESC ORDER BY DESC ORDER BY DESC 650 2927 00 386 5954 00 386 7099 00 174 2288 00 42822 4 614 0935 00 614 0936 00 614 0952 00 614 0953 00 614 0954 00 ORDER BY DESC TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Mechanical Parts List Figure 10 1 External modules 10 7 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Mechanical Parts List Replaceable Parts List Fig amp index number 2 1 2 3 17 18 19 20 10 8 Serial no discont d Serial no effective Tektronix part number 212 0189 00 119 5044 00 174 2349 00 671 4172 00 671 4171 00 671 3693 00 441 1902 01 334 7966 02 131 1315 01 679 2437 00 407 3825 00 386 6182 00 386 5872 00 131 0890 01 348 1300 00 211 0730 00 119 5901 00 407 4486 00 671 2847 00 671 2848 00 671 4165 00 671 4166 00 671 4493 00 671 4492 00 671 4167 00 671 4168 00 671 3314 00 671 3462 02 671 4163 00 671 4164 00 671 4161 00 671 4162 00 348 1422 00 259 0101 02 407 3878 00 407
64. and use the MSDOS procedure m Using Microsoft MSDOS enter SCANDISK drive SURFACE AUTOFIX 4 If ScanDisk will not repair the disk install a new hard disk drive TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 59 Troubleshooting Press on the principal power switch on the back of the oscilloscope Power off and remove the cover using the Rear Cover and Cabinet removal No procedure Check all the cables coming out of the Low Voltage Power Supply and the cabling between modules Be Press the ON STBY button Can you hear the Can you N hear the fan i Y fan now sure every cable is attached securely es Yes Perform the A16 Low voltage power supply module A il isolation troubleshooting e oscilloscope rocedure powers on do the front No Perform the Processor front panel panel lights come on and r troubleshooting procedure There is something 30 E wrong with the ON STBY later Does the No button Perform the system power Processor front panel Yes on now troubleshooting procedure Yes Does the display seem No _ gt to be working at all Yes Is the display No x readable and stable Yes the oscilloscope respond correctly when the front panel buttons are pushed No Perform the Processor front panel troubleshooting procedure Yes Does
65. at the bottom of the bus plugs into the acquisition board TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 29 Removal and Installation Procedures A23 SerPar Board RS232 Centronics Hardcopy Interface Optional on Some Models 6 30 See the procedure Rear Cover and Cabinet page 6 18 to complete reassembly of the oscilloscope 1 Remove circuit board assembly a Using a screwdriver with size T 15 Torx tip remove the two screws number 4 in Figure 6 11 securing the rear plate of the circuit board assembly b Disconnect the cable connector number 2 from the processor display circuit board connector number 1 Pull out the A23 SerPar Board assembly number 3 Figure 6 11 Remove circuit board assembly from oscilloscope TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures 2 Remove circuit board from assembly a Using a inch nutdriver remove the four lock connectors number 3 in Figure 6 12 securing the circuit board to the rear plate b Separate the circuit board with attached cable number 1 from the rear plate with attached brackets number 2 Figure 6 12 Remove circuit board from assembly 3 Replace circuit board Equipment Required One inch nutdriver a Replace the failed circuit board with a replacement A23 SerPar Board ordered from the factory see Replaceable Parts List for detailed ordering inf
66. at maximum offset and position Do the following substeps test CH 1 first skipping substep 2a since CH 1 is already selected from step 1 a Select an unchecked channel m Press WAVEFORM OFF to remove the channel just confirmed from the display Press the front panel button that corresponds to the channel you are to confirm m Set the generator output to O V m Move the test hookup to the channel you selected b Turn on the measurement Mean for the channel m Press MEASURE then press the main menu button Select Measrmnt for CHx Press the side menu button more until the menu label Mean appears PF in the side menu its icon is shown at the left Press the side menu button Mean m Press CLEAR MENU Set the vertical scale Set the vertical SCALE to one of the settings listed in Table 4 3 that is not yet checked Start with the first setting listed TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 33 Performance Tests 4 34 Table 4 3 DC Voltage measurement accuracy Position TDS 500D 700D Scale setting Offset Generator TDS 600B except TDS 794D setting Divs setting setting Accuracy limits Accuracy limits 5 mV 4 040V 41 0329V to 1 0471 V 41 0355 V to 1 0445 V 45 1V L040V 10471V to 1 0329 V 1 0445 V to 1 0355 V 200 mV 40V 4L6V 4114165Vto 411 7835 V 411 5195 V to 411 6805 V 1 01V 417 621 V to 418 379 V 5 10V 18V 18 899 V to 17 102 V
67. bit 003 1457 01 for T 20 size screw heads fan removal only 5 F lat bladed screwdriver Screwdriver for removing standard headed screws 6 Needle Nose Pliers Standard too 7 Nutdriver inch Standard too 8 Retaining Ring Pliers Standard tool 126 inch minimum throw 9 Angle Tip Tweezers Standard too 10 Soldering Iron Standard too 14 Adhesive TRA CON Tra Bond BA 2114 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 11 Removal and Installation Procedures Fuse Cap Line Fuse Handle Handle Cap 7 Pad f ootPa x Frame Flip Stand TS F E b di Front Panel Knobs EMI Gasket Menu Buttons QQ 00000 Q Attenuator Cover A12 Front Panel pue Assembly Trim Ring Front Cover Figure 6 1 External modules 6 12 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures Optional A29 Video Trigger Board A11 DRAM Processor Display Board Optional A40 Hard Disk Drive Board A23 SerPar Board Rear Chassis Disk Drive Board Bracket Analog and Digital Power Cables A10 Acquisition Board Figure 6 2 Outer chassis modules TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 13 Removal and Installation Procedures A30 Display Assembly A16 Power Supply m wn wn Figure 6 3 Inner chass
68. diagnostics Turn off the principal power switch Disconnect the line cord from its power source Remove the oscilloscope rear cover and cabinet using the Rear Cover and Cabinet removal procedure there 25 V across 27 pins 1 and 3 on the A11 DRAM Processor Display module See Figure 6 36 Replace the All DRAM Processor Display module The Low Voltage Power Suppl is ok Perform the P rimary troubleshooting procedure oscilloscope have adequate ventilation as specified in Section 2 Operating Information on page 2 3 Create adequate ventilation Replace the A10 Acquisition module Connect the fan Yes fan s connector securely attached to J 20 on the A11 DRAM Processor Display module See Figure 6 36 Yes Unplug the fan power on the oscilloscope and probe J 20 Is Replace the fan Figure 6 28 A16 Low voltage power supply module isolation troubleshooting procedure TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 63 Troubleshooting 6 64 Table 6 5 Normal supply voltages measured on J26 and J27 on the A11 DRAM Processor Display module Supply Lower Limit Upper Limit Ground J 26 or J 27 pin 15 415 1 VA 27 pin 5 5 0 V 5 2 V 5 1 VB J 27 pin 17 5 0 V 5 2 V 25 V J 27 pin 1 23 5 V 27 5 V 5 V J 26 pin 39 H 9V 51V 5 1 V J 26 pin 17 49V 5
69. for the P6139A 5 10 Display Assembly 5 21 Maintenance Maintenance sesione Sha ex wale alana ele Sy ie Me ene ES 6 1 Related Maintenance Procedures 6 1 Preparation a bep ere tne ie tee 6 2 Inspection and Cleaning 0 0 0 cece 6 4 Removal and Installation Procedures 6 9 Preparation Please Read 6 9 Access Procedure ieu EE oe EE ee bs pe quse Rd ob ide 6 15 Procedures for External 6 16 Procedures for Outer Chassis Modules 6 28 Procedures for Inner Chassis Modules 6 47 Disassembly for Cleaning 0 0 0 eee eee ce ee eee 6 54 i TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Table of Contents Troubleshooting Diagnostics Firmware Updates Hard Disk Drive Maintenance Options Options and Accessories Options cei v E Sr ERES Standard Accessories Optional Accessories Electrical Parts List Electrical Parts List Diagrams Diagrams Symbols
70. front panel button to enter help mode Front panel knobs and buttons now display information about their function when turned or pushed Push HELP again to exit help mode To get help information on a menu item display the menu desired if you are in help mode exit help first Push HELP Now the menu buttons display informa tion about their function when pushed Push the SHIFT then the STATUS front panel buttons to display the status menu You will find messages reflecting the state of the acquisition system whether it is running or stopped and if it is stopped why as well as setup related information TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Operating Instructions How to Set Functions Most functions can be set either by using one or two front panel button s or knob s or by pushing a front panel button to use a main menu and then a side menu button to set the function The following steps illustrate both procedures 1 Locate the block that contains the function to be set Vertical function controls Access all Horizontal function controls Trigger function controls vertical functions and inputs from Access all horizontal functions Access all trigger functions this front panel control block from this front panel block from this front panel block SAVE RECALL WAVEFORM APPLICATION MENU 34 ACQUIRE MENU MEASURE HARDCOPY RUN STOP SELECT Gen E cuum UTILITY D
71. is 1 Waveform Interval for the waveform record where the waveform interval WI is the time between the samples in the waveform record Record Length Selection Table 1 5 Nominal traits Triggering system Name Description Range Delayed Trigger Time Delay 16 ns to 2505 Range Events Delay TDS 600B 2 to 10 000 000 TDS 500D 700D 1 to 10 000 000 Range Time for Pulse G litch lnstols Pulse Width Time Q ualified Runt Timeout or Slew Rate Trigger Delta Time TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 1 13 Nominal Traits Table 1 5 Nominal traits Triggering system cont Name Ranges Setup and Hold for TimeS etup Hold Violation Trigger Description Feature Min to max Setup Time 100 ns to 100 ns Hold Time 1 ns to 100 ns Setup Hold Time 2 ns ForSetup Time positive numbers mean a data transition before the clock edge and negative means a transition after the clock edge For Hold Time positive numbers mean a data transition after the clock edge and negative means a transition before the clock edge Setup Hold Time is the algebraic sum of the Setup Time and the Hold Time programmed by the user Ranges Trigger Level or Threshold Video Trigger Modes of Operation Source Range Any Channel 12 divisions from center of screen Auxiliary 8 V Line 400 V Supports the following video standards m NTSC 525 60 2 field mono or 4 field
72. its face is down with its front cover on the work surface and its bottom facing you 6 18 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures 3 Disconnect the line cord Unplug the line cord from its receptacle at the rear cover 4 Remove rear cover Remove the four screws securing the rear cover to the oscilloscope Lift off the rear cover 5 Remove the cabinet a At the rear of the cabinet grasp its left and right edges b Pull upward to slide the cabinet off the oscilloscope Take care not to bind or snag the cabinet on the oscilloscope s internal cabling as you remove it STOP DO NOT do steps 6 through 8 to remove the EMI gasket s unless they must be replaced due to damage If you are not replacing those gaskets skip to Step 9 When reinstalling EMI gaskets and or the oscilloscope cabinet carefully follow the instructions given Unless they are performed properly the oscilloscope may not meet its emissions requirements EMI 6 Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed a Have handy a pair of needle nose pliers Item 6 b Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram External modules Figure 6 1 7 Remove the EMI gaskets a Look for the point where the ends of the gasket touch in the channel at the rear edge of the cabinet b Use a pair of needle nose pliers to pry up one of the ends c Grasp the EMI gasket and gently pull it out of the i
73. knob to position the trigger two divisions to the left of the center screen Press MEASURE If needed press the main menu Select Measrmnt Press the side menu Negative Width Press the side menu Period b Set up the pulse generator for Sync Duty Cycle Test Set PULSE DURATION to 50 ns Set PERIOD to 10 us Set OUTPUT VOLTS to 1 for LOW LEVEL and 1 for HIGH LEVEL Depress the COMPLEMENT button Be sure BACK TERM is depressed in TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 83 Performance Tests Check Sync Duty Cycle m Connect the pulse generator through a 50 Q cable and a 50 terminator to the oscilloscope CH1 input See Figure 4 38 Pulse Generator Oscilloscope 50 O cable 50 Q terminator Figure 4 38 Setup for sync duty cycle test m Turn the pulse generator OUTPUT VOLTS control until the signal on the oscilloscope shows a one division negative going pulse See Figure 4 39 NOTE You may need to adjust the trigger level control to obtain a stable trigger 4 84 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests Tek Run 250MS s Sample Select Measurement C1 width 404 0ns Low signal amplitude Period cs s No period Frequency found Positi width Negative P width RE 282mv w T1 M 200ns Chit oV mere i
74. m PAL 625 50 2 field mono or SECAM 8 field m HDTV 787 5 60 1050 60 1125 60 1250 60 m FlexFormat user definable standards User can specify field rate number of lines sync pulse width and polarity line rate and vertical interval timing 1 14 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Nominal Traits Table 1 5 Nominal traits Triggering system cont Name Description Communication Trigger Modes of Standard Name Code BitRate Operation Option 2C Comm Trigger OC1 STMO NRZ 51 84 Mb s OC3 STM1 NRZ 155 52 Mb s OC12 STM4 NRZ 622 08 Mb s 05050 Masks 64 kb s DSO Dbl Masks 64 kb s 050 Data Contra Masks 64 kb s 050 Timing Masks 64 kb s El AMI 2 048 Mb s E2 AMI 8 44 Mb s E3 AMI 34 368 Mb s E4 CMI 139 26 Mb s E5 CEPT NRZ 565 Mb s STMIE CMI 155 52 Mb s DS1 AMI 1 544 Mb s DS1A AMI 2 048 Mb s DS1C AMI 3 152 Mb s DS2 AMI 6 312 Mb s DS3 DS3 Rate AMI 44 736 Mb s DS4NA 139 26 Mb s 515 1 51 84 Mb s STS 3 CMI 155 52 Mb s FC133 NRZ 132 8 Mb s FC266 NRZ 265 6 Mb s FC531 NRZ 531 2 Mb s FC1063 NRZ 1 0625 Mb s D2 NRZ 143 18 Mb s D1 NRZ 270 Mb s FDDI NRZ 125 Mb s 4 2 2 SMPTE 259M D NRZ 360 Mb s 10 Base T NRZ 10 Mb s 100 Base T NRZ 125 Mb s Gigabit Ethernet NRZ 1 25 Gb s AMI Alternate Mark Inversion CMI Code Mark Inversion NRZ Non return to Zero These Telecom 050 standards are automatically selected from the Mask Menu The trigger uses Pulse Width trigger Table 1
75. menu button Level assigns the general purpose knob to control the readout appearing in the button label It also copies the readout to the general purpose knob readout area in the right corner of the screen Example Push Level 19 Usethe general purpose knob 20 to adjust the trigger level to the setting desired Example Turn the knob to 20 mV More About the General Purpose Knob As you ve just seen the general purpose knob can be used to extend the number of choices available to a side menu button The general purpose knob can also be assigned to control the following functions Cursor positioning m Display intensities m Delay time TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 2 13 Operating Instructions 2 14 Gated measurements Number of events Template generation Trigger position Holdoff Offset Variable persistence In all cases the menus are used to select the function to which the general purpose knob is assigned The following attributes apply to this knob Depending on the function it is assigned to control the general purpose knob may vary numerical readouts position objects cursors on screen or select between icon label settings that show up in side menu labels The general purpose knob has a readout area at the upper right corner of the screen See Figure 2 1 This readout always reflects the name and value of the function that the general purpose knob is currently controlling Wh
76. order to troubleshoot it It also details the service strategy and lists options for obtaining maintenance service and for replacing failed modules Section 3 Theory of Operation contains a circuit description at the module or block level Section 4 Performance Verification contains procedures that may be useful in isolating problems to modules by testing oscilloscope performance Section 5 Adjustment Procedures addresses after repair adjustment and the interval between periodic adjustments It contains a procedure for adjusting the internal circuits of the oscilloscope Section 9 Diagrams contains a block diagram using individual modules as blocks and an interconnection diagram showing connections between the modules Section 10 Mechanical Parts List lists all field replaceable modules by part number TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 1 Maintenance Preparation Before servicing this product read the Safety Summary and Introduction at the front of the manual and the ESD information below CAUTION Static discharge can damage any semiconductor component in this oscilloscope Preventing ESD When performing any service which requires internal access to the oscilloscope adhere to the following precautions to avoid damaging internal modules and their components due to electrostatic discharge ESD 1 2 Minimize handling of static sensitive modules Transport and store static sensitive m
77. output terminals A power cord with the appropriate plug configuration is supplied with each oscilloscope Table 2 1 gives the color coding of the conductors in the power cord If you require a power cord other than the one supplied refer to Table 2 2 Power Cord Identification TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 2 1 Installation Operating Voltage Table 2 1 Power cord conductor identification Conductor Alternate Color Ungrounded Line Black Grounded Neutral Light Blue White Grounded Earthing Green Yellow Green Table 2 2 Power cord identification Plug configuration Option number North America Standard 125V Europe 230V United Kingdom 230 V North America 230V S witzerland A5 230V This oscilloscope operates with any line voltage from 90 250 VACgys with line frequency from 45 440 Hz There are two fuses either of which may be used throughout the line voltage and frequency ranges The two fuses are not totally interchangeable as each requires a different fuse cap TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Installation Memory Backup Power Memory modules with on board batteries allow the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscopes to retain some types of data upon loss of the AC power source The stored adjustment constants saved front panel settings current front panel settings instrument status and waveforms saved in memory are retained
78. perform all of these procedures depending on what you want to accomplish To rapidly confirm that the oscilloscope functions and was adjusted properly just do the brief procedures under Self Tests which begin on page 4 5 Advantages These procedures are quick to do require no external equipment or signal sources and perform extensive functional and accuracy testing to provide high confidence that the oscilloscope will perform properly They can be used as a quick check before making a series of important measurements To further check functionality first do the Self Tests just mentioned then do the brief procedures under Functional Tests that begin on page 4 7 Advantages These procedures require minimal additional time to perform require no additional equipment other than a standard accessory probe and more completely test the internal hardware of the oscilloscope They can be used to quickly determine if the oscilloscope is suitable for putting into service such as when it is first received If more extensive confirmation of performance is desired do the Perform ance Tests beginning on page 4 15 after doing the Functional and Self Tests just referenced Advantages These procedures add direct checking of warranted specifica tions They require more time to perform and suitable test equipment is required See Equipment Required beginning on page 4 16 If you are not familiar with operating this oscilloscope rea
79. the display assembly if it has been repaired or if brightness and contrast have become unsatisfactory Brightness and Contrast Equipment Adjustment required One 6X magnifier Item 16 One J 17 Photometer with a J 1803 Luminance Probe Item 17 TDS 500D 620B and 680B Monochrome Only 1 Access the inside of the oscilloscope See Removal and Installation Procedures in Section 6 to remove the cabinet 2 Adjust the display brightness a Display the Composite test pattern Switch No Open Leave the oscilloscope powered off Set the DIP switch located near the front of the All DRAM Processor Display as follows Closed Power on the oscilloscope Press SHIFT then press UTILITY Repeatedly press the main menu button System until Diag Err is highlighted in the pop up menu Repeatedly press the main menu button Area until Display is highlighted in the pop up menu Repeatedly press the side menu button more until Composite appears in the side menu Push Composite Press the main menu button EXECUTE then press the side menu button Ok Confirm Run Test TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 5 21 Adjustment Procedures b Make the brightness adjustment m Locate R569 BRIGHTNESS It is one of the two adjustments on the left side of the instrument located just ahead of the fan It is the adjustment nearest the fan W Observe the luminance patches using a 6X magnifier m Ad
80. the oscilloscope m 11 Processor Display Board page 6 35 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 39 Removal and Installation Procedures Rear Panel Cables A10 Acquisition Board 6 40 1 1 m If option 05 is installed A29 Video Trigger Board page 6 32 m A74 DI Bus and Analog Power and Digital Power Cables page 6 28 m A23 SerPar Board page 6 30 m Front Cover Trim Ring Menu Buttons and Attenuator Panel page 6 22 m Rear Cover and Cabinet page 6 18 Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed Have available a pair of needle nose pliers Item 6 and a inch nut driver Item 7 If removing the GPIB cable do the following substeps a Unplug the GPIB cable from its jack J35 on the processor display board Working from the rear panel and using the inch nut driver unscrew the two hex headed mounting posts that secure the cable to the rear chassis Working from inside the oscilloscope lift the cable out of the rear chassis If removing any cable connected to the rear panel BNC connectors do the following substeps a b Do the procedure 70 Acquisition Board on page 6 40 Pull out the cables for SIGNAL OUTPUT AUX TRIGGER INPUT MAIN TRIGGER OUTPUT and DELAYED TRIGGER OUTPUT from J1201 J1001 J1000 and J1550 on A10 Reinstallation Reverse substeps in step 2 and 3 to reinstall any cables removed Assemble equipment and locate modules to be remove
81. the test suites the discussion of the Diagnostics on page 6 57 explains how to do this Do the Processor Acq tests pass now There is a problem in the communication link between the A10 Acquisition and the A11 DRAM Processor Display module The A10 Acquisition most likely failed so replace this module Run the Extended Diagnostics again Do the Processor Acq tests pass now Replace the All DRAM Processor Display module Figure 6 33 Processor acquisition troubleshooting procedure TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 67 Troubleshooting This procedure helps you determine if the A11 DRAM Processor Display or the A12 Front Panel module is bad Is the cable from the All DRAM Connect the cable and then Processor Display module to perform the Primary the A12 Front Panel module troubleshooting procedure securely connected Power off and remove the cable from J 2 on the 11 pins dramatically DRAM P rocessor Display decresce when the module P robe P2 pins 10 ON STBY button and 8 with an ohm meter is toggled On the All DRAM Is the Processor Display ON STBY module probe J 26 button working pins 3 and 5 with correctly an ohm meter see Figure 6 36 the resistance between these two pins Power off the oscilloscope remove the cable Yes from J 2 of the All DRAM Processor Display
82. within limits is checked in Performance Tests which begin on page 4 15 STOP DO NOT make changes to the front panel settings that are not called out in the procedures Each verification procedure will require you to set the oscilloscope to certain default settings before verifying functions If you make changes to these settings other than those called out in the procedure you may obtain invalid results In this case just redo the procedure from step 1 When you are instructed to press a menu button the button may already be selected its label will be highlighted If this is the case it is not necessary to press the button Verify All Input Channels Equipment required One probe such as the P 6243 P6245 P6139A or P6339A Prerequisites None 1 Install the test hookup and preset the oscilloscope controls a Hook up the signal source Install the probe on CH 1 Connect the probe tip to PROBE COMPENSATION SIGNAL on the front panel TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 7 Brief Procedures connect the probe ground typically black to PROBE COMPENSA TION GND If using a P6243 or P6245 probe you may want to attach a Y lead connector and two SMD KlipChips as shown in Figure 4 3 c co ED _ lololololo lo o 0000 oo 90000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D
83. 0 334 9097 00 334 9098 00 334 9389 00 334 9708 00 334 9663 00 334 9664 00 334 9665 00 334 9666 00 Qty Name amp description 4 SCR ASSEM WS HR 8 32 X 0 500 PNH STL CDPL T 20 COVER REAR REAR COSMETIC COVER MARKER IDENT REAR LABEL SAFETY UL CSA CE TDS7XX CABLE ASSY PWR 3 18 AWG 92 L SVT TAN STANDARD ACCESSORY CLAMP PWR CORD POLYMIDE STANDARD ACCESSORY CAP FUSEHOLDER 3AG FUSES AMERICAN CAP FUSEHOLDER 5 X 20MM FUSES EUROPEAN FUSE CARTRIDGE 3AG 6A 250V FAST BLOW AMERICAN FUSE CART DIN 5 X 20MM 5AMP 250VSLOW EUROPEAN CABINET ASSY HANDLE CARRYING 11 54 L W CLIP CAP RETAINER PLASTIC CABINET SCOPE FOOT CABINET PAD FOOT TEK BLACK SANTOPRENE FLIPSTAND CAB GASKET SHIELD 348 1109 00 CUT 45 01 COVER FRONT PLASTIC STANDARD ACCESSORY TRIM DECORATIVE FRONT TRIM DECORATIVE FRONT for use in Opt 1R rackmount instruments MARKER IDENT FRONT PANEL 500MHZ 2GS S TDS520D MARKER IDENT FRONT PANEL 500MHZ 2GS S TDS540D MARKER IDENT FRONT PANEL 500MHZ 1GS S TDS540D OPT 1G MARKER IDENT FRONT LABEL TDS620B MARKER IDENT FRONT LABEL TDS644B MARKER IDENT FRONT LABEL TDS680B MARKER IDENT FRONT LABEL TDS684B MARKER IDENT FRONT PANEL 500MHZ 2GS S TDS 724D MARKER IDENT FRONT PANEL 500MHZ 2GS S TDS 7540 MARKER IDENT FRONT PANEL 500MHZ 1GS S TDS 7540 OPT 1G MARKER IDENT FRONT PANEL 1GHZ 4GS S TDS 784D MARKER IDENT MKD FRONT PANEL 2GHZ 4GS S TDS 7940 TDS 500D TDS 6
84. 000 V est 3 250 V 8 900 V 4 500 V 9 1200 V 5 400 to 600 V TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 3 Maintenance Inspection and Cleaning General Care Inspection and Cleaning Procedures A 6 4 Inspection and Cleaning describes how to inspect for dirt and damage It also describes how to clean the exterior and interior of the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscopes Inspection and cleaning are done as preventive maintenance Preventive maintenance when done regularly may prevent oscilloscope malfunction and enhance its reliability Preventive maintenance consists of visually inspecting and cleaning the oscilloscope and using general care when operating it How often to do maintenance depends on the severity of the environment in which the oscilloscope is used A proper time to perform preventive maintenance is just before oscilloscope adjustment The cabinet helps keep dust out of the oscilloscope and should normally be in place when operating the oscilloscope The oscilloscope s front cover protects the front panel and display from dust and damage Install it when storing or transporting the oscilloscope Inspect and clean the oscilloscope as often as operating conditions require The collection of dirt on components inside can cause them to overheat and break down Dirt acts as an insulating blanket preventing efficient heat dissipation Dirt also provides an electrical conduction path th
85. 00B and TDS 700D Service Manual Mfr code OKBO1 TK1163 OKB05 TK2432 TK1163 61935 61935 75915 61857 0 9P9 80009 0 ROS 80009 80009 80009 TK0488 80009 80009 TK1163 TK1163 0 05 0KB05 0 05 80009 80009 80009 80009 0KB05 0 05 OKB05 OKB05 OKB05 Mfr part number ORDER BY DESC 200 3695 02 334 9709 00 ORDER BY DESC ORDER BY DESC FEK 031 1666 FEK 031 1663 312006 ET 5 AMP 650 3595 01 367024701 ORDER BY DESC 437046500 348111004 348125401 ORDER BY DESC 348110901 200369601 ORDER BY DESC ORDER BY DESC 334 9659 00 334 9660 00 334 9661 00 334 9095 00 334 9097 00 334 9098 00 334 9389 00 334 9708 00 334 9663 00 334 9664 00 334 9665 00 334 9666 00 10 5 Mechanical Parts List Replaceable Parts List Cont Fig amp index number 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 10 6 Tektronix Serialno Serial no part number effective discont d 214 4287 01 366 2114 00 366 2111 00 650 2927 00 386 5954 00 386 7099 00 174 2288 00 131 1688 00 614 0935 00 614 0936 00 614 0952 00 614 0953 00 614 0954 00 366 2170 00 Qty amp description 1 2 3 ACTUATOR ELASTOMER MAT FRONT KNOB LARGE DETENTED KNOB SMALL FLUTED REPLACEABLE AS DISPLAY FRAME WITH FLEX PANEL INPUT P LASTIC ATTE NUATOR PANEL INPUT P LASTIC ATTENUATOR TDS794D ONLY CA ASSY PWR 18 AWG 3 5 L RTANG 0 25
86. 01B and calibrated short wavelength optical reference calibration receiver on channel 1 Option applies to TDS 500D amp TDS 700D only except TDS 794D 4C P6703B with system Oscilloscope comes with a P6703B and calibrated long wavelength optical reference calibration receiver on channel 1 Option applies to TDS 500D amp TDS 700D only except TDS 794D 7 2 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Options and Accessories Table 7 1 Options cont Option Label Description 31 Buffered passive probe Add a 500 Mhz P 6339A 10x buffered passive probe Option applies only to TDS 794D 32 Active probe Add a 4 Ghz P6217 active probe Option applies only to TDS 794D TDS 784D and TDS 580D 33 Low capacitance probe Add a 3 0 Ghz probe only P6158 20x 1 low capacitance probe Option applies only to TDS 580D TDS 784D and TDS 794D 34 Differential probe Add a 1 Ghz probe only P 6247 differential probe Option applies only to TDS 500D and TDS 700D 35 Active probe Add a 1 Ghz probe only P 6243 active probe Option applies only to TDS 754D TDS 724D TDS 540D and TDS 520D 36 Passive probe Add a 500 MHz P6139A 10X passive probe Option applies only to TDS 784D and TDS 580D 37 Active probe Add a 1 5 GHz P6245 active probe Option applies only to TDS 784D and TDS 580D 2D Two probes Delete two standard probes normally shipped with the oscilloscope Option applies only to TDS 520D and TDS 620B models 2F A
87. 09 10 4 Manufacturer INSTRUMENT SPECIALTIES CO INC PARSONS MFG CORP TRIAX METAL PRODUCTS INC DIV OF BEAVERTON PARTS MFG CO TEAC AMERICA INC 3M COMPANY 3M COMPANY ELECTRONIC PRODUCTS DIV HARBOR ELECTRONICS COMPANY SAN 0 INDUSTRIAL CORP SCHURTER INC LITTELFUSE TRACOR INC SUB OF TRACOR INC TEKTRONIX INC Address EXIT 53 RT 80 BOXA 1055 OBRIAN DR 1800 NW 216TH AVE 7133 TELEGRAPH RD PO BOX 750 INDUSTRIAL TAPE DIVISION 3M CENTER 3M AUSTIN CENTER 14500 S BROADWAY 91 3 COLIN DRIVE 1016 CLEGG COURT 800 E NORTHWEST HWY 14150 SW KARL BRAUN DR PO BOX 500 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual City state zip code DELAWARE WATER GAP PA 18327 MENLO PARK CA 94025 1408 HILLSBORO OR 97124 6629 MONTEBELLO CA 90640 6537 ST PAUL MN 55144 1000 AUSTIN TX 78769 2963 GARDENA CA 90248 HOLBROOK NY 11741 PETALUMA CA 94952 1152 DES PLAINES IL 60016 3049 BEAVERTON OR 97077 0001 Mechanical Parts List Replaceable Parts List Fig amp index number 1 1 32 17 Tektronix Serial no Serial no part number effective discont d 212 0189 00 200 3695 02 334 9709 00 161 0230 01 343 1213 00 200 2264 00 200 2265 00 159 0013 00 159 0210 00 650 3595 01 367 0247 01 200 2191 00 437 0465 00 348 1110 04 348 1254 01 348 0875 00 348 1109 01 200 3696 01 101 0142 00 101 0142 01 334 9659 00 334 9660 00 334 9661 00 334 9095 0
88. 098 0564 09 03 620 0063 05 441 2043 00 386 5871 01 10 11 Mechanical Parts List A20 A30 A30 shown Figure 10 3 Inner chassis modules TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 10 12 Mechanical Parts List Replaceable Parts List Fig amp index Tektronix number part number 4 1 174 2031 00 Serial no Serial no Mfr effective discontd Qty Name amp description code Mfr part number CABLE ASSY RF 50 OHM COAX 6 5 L W BLUE J KT TK2338 174 2031 00 10 1000 MAIN TO TRIGGER OUTPUT 10 1001 TO DELAYED TRIGGER OUTPUT 4 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 10 13 Mechanical Parts List Figure 10 4 Cables bottom view 10 14 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Mechanical Parts List Replaceable Parts List Fig amp index Tektronix Serial no Serial no number part number effective discont d 5 1 174 1525 00 2 174 1524 01 129 1439 00 3 174 2975 00 131 0890 01 4 346 0266 00 5 174 3736 00 6 174 3735 00 7 174 1728 00 174 0655 00 174 3728 00 174 3729 00 Qty Name amp description 2 CA ASSY SP ELEC 2 X 8 13 28 AWG CA ASSY SP RIBBON GPIB IDC 24 28 AWG 4 0L SPACER P OST 0 17 L 4 40 BRS 0 25 RND USE WITH 174 1524 XX ONLY CA ASSY SP RIBBON CPR 16 28 AWG 4 0 L CONN HARDWARE DSUB J ACK SCREW STRAP CABLE P LASTIC CA ASSY SP ELEC 50 28 AWG 5 85 L F LAT CA A
89. 100 mV div 10 V div DC 500 MHz DC 1GHz 50 mV div 99 5 mV div DC 450 MHz DC 750 MHz 20 mV div 49 8 mV div DC 300 MHz DC 600 MHz 10 mV div 19 9 mV div DC 250 MHz DC 500 MHz Accuracy Delta Time Measurement The limits are given in the following table for signals having amplitude greater than 5 divisions reference level 50 filter set to sinX X acquired at5 mV div or greater Forthe TDS 700D pulse duration 10 div Channel skew not included For the Single Shot condition 1 4 lt T S lt 4 where Siis the sample interval and T is the displayed rise time TDS 6008 For the averaged condition 1 4 lt T W lt 40 where W is the Waveform Interval as described elsewhere in these specifications TDS 600B Extra error in the measurement will occur for two channel measurements due to channel to channel skew This is described elsewhere in these specifications Time measurement accuracy Conditions for accuracy listed atright TDS 600B 0 20 x sample interval 100 ppm x Reading 0 05 x Wi are Single Shotor Sample mode or HiRes TDS 600B example at 5 GS s 5 ns div measuring 40 ns wide pulse with Full Bandwidth selected accuracy 40 ps 4 ps 5 ps 49 ps TDS 500D 700D 0 15 sample interval 25 ppm Reading t div 1000 TDS 5000 7000 example at 4 Gs s accuracy 37 5 ps Conditions for accuracy listed at right TDS 600B 10 ps 100 ppm Readi
90. 17 621 V 1 0445 V 1 0355 V CH4 200 mV Vert scale setting 11 6805 V 11 5195 V orAX2 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH4 1 01 V Vert scale setting 17 621 V orAX2 5 Div position setting 10 V offset 18 379 V CH4 1 01 V Vert scale setting 18 379 V 17 621 V orAX2 5 Div position setting 10 V offset Analog Bandwidth CH1 100mV N A CH2 100mV JAM Aree ote c teer s mr N A CH3 2 0 5 s Jo ln N A orAX1 100mV CH4 424 mV N A orAX2 100 mV TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 23 Performance Tests TDS 500D 700D Test Record cont Instrument Serial Number Certificate Number Temperature RH 96 Date of Calibration Technician TDS 500D 700D Performance Test Delay Between Channels Time Base System Long Term Sample Rate Delay Time Q 100 ns 10 0 ms Trigger System Accuracy Pulse Glitch or P ulse Width Hor scale lt 1 us Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum NA Bl dude 777 Lower Limit 6 5 ns Upper Limit 6 5 ns Pulse Glitch or P ulse Width Hor scale 1 us Lower Limit 2 1 us Upper Limit 2 1 us Main Trigger DC Coupled Positive Slope 9 8853 V PERSE 10 1147 V Main Trigger DC Coupled Negative Slope 9 8853 V NE eee 10 1147 V Delayed Trigger DC Coupled Positive Slope 9 8853 V et en eee CERERI 10 1147 V Delayed Trigger DC Coupled Ne
91. 250 kHz five division sine wave on screen Set the vertical SCALE to 20 mV the waveform will overdrive the display Press SET LEVEL TO 50 Check against limits Do the following subparts in the order listed Press the side menu button Lower Limit Use the general purpose knob to increase Lower Limit readout until triggering is lost CHECK that the Lower Limit readout after the oscilloscope stops triggering is within 1 9 us to 2 1 us inclusive Enter time on test record Use the keypad to return the Lower Limit to 500 ns and reestablish triggering Press the side menu button Upper Limit then use the general purpose knob to slowly decrease the Upper Limit readout until triggering stops CHECK that the Upper Limit readout after the oscilloscope loses triggering is within 1 9 us to 2 1 us inclusive Enter time on test record 4 Disconnect the hookup Disconnect the cable from the generator output at the input connector of CH 1 4 52 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests Check Accuracy Equipment Trigger Level or required Threshold DC Coupled One DC calibration generator Item 9 One BNC T connector Item 7 Two 50 precision coaxial cables Item 5 Prerequisites See page 4 15 Oscilloscope DC Calibrator Dual banana ad BNC adapters BNCT connector 50 coaxial cables Fi
92. 2V 15 V J 26 pin 11 14 7 V 15 3 V 15 V J 26 pin 7 14 7 V 15 3 V Table 6 6 No load supply voltages measured on J5 and J6 on the A17 Main LV Power Supply module Supply Lower Limit Upper Limit Ground J 5 or 6 pin 15 15 1 VA J 6 pin 5 4 95 V 5 25 V 5 1 VB J 6 pin 17 4 95 V 5 25 V 25 V J 6 pin 1 23 5 V 27 5 V 5 V J 5 pin 39 0 59 V 0 81 V 5 1 V J 5 pin 17 0 39 V 0 61 V 15 V J 5 pin 11 1 05 V 1 75 V 15V J5 pin 7 1 05 V 1 75 V Figure 6 29 Power supply voltage measurement locations TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Troubleshooting This procedure helps you determine whether the color display or the A11 DRAM Processor Display module is bad Is the display legible but the horizontal and or vertical sync do not look ok Power the oscilloscope off and disconnect the cable from J 5 on the A11 DRAM Processor Display module see Figure 6 36 then power back on Does J62 1 on the A11 DRAM Processor Display module see Figure 6 36 have a video signal with the same levels as Figure 6 32 J 5 pins 1 and 2 at 425 V and J 5 pins 3 and 4 at 45 1 V On the A11 DRAM Processor Display module probe J 27 but DO NOT REMOVE the cable from the connector The voltages will change if the A11 DRAM Processor Display is not connected to the power supply Are J 27 pin
93. 5022 Optical Option 3C and 4C Software Attenuator based Adjustments 23 Cable Fibre Optic FC FC fiber cable Tektronix part number Option 3C and 4C Software 174 2322 00 based Adjustments 24 Optical to ElectricalCon P6701B used with Option 3C Tektronix P6701B or P6703B Option 3C and 4C Software verter or based Adjustments P6703B used with Option 4C optical to electrical converter 1 You may replace items 11 12 13 14 and 15 with a Wavetek 9100 with options 100 and 600 for 500 MHz oscilloscopes or a Wavetek 9500 with option 100 and output head appropriate for the bandwidth of the oscilloscope s being tested Requires a TM 500 or TM 5000 Series Power Module Mainframe 3 If available you may replace items 13 14 and 15 with a Tegam Tektronix SG5030 and its leveling head for bandwidths up to 500MHz or a Tegam Tektronix SG503 and SG504 with SG504 leveling head for bandwidths up to 1 GHz Adjustment Instructions The following instructions describe installing the software on your system setting up the oscilloscope for adjustment and starting the adjustment of the oscilloscope by the software Hardware Installation 1 Install the proper GPIB card see System on page 5 2 Use the manual accompanying your GPIB card to install and configure that card 2 Configure the GPIB card a This software is compatible with cards configured for PCII and PCIIA operation The following table lists the default card settings 5 6
94. 600B or 50 C for the TDS 500D and 700D The warm up requirement is usually met in the course of meeting the Self Tests and Functional Tests prerequisites listed above TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 15 Performance Tests Equipment Required These procedures use external traceable signal sources to directly check warranted characteristics The required equipment list follows this introduction Table 4 1 Test equipment Item number and Minimum requirements description Example Purpose l Attenuator 10X Ratio 10X impedance 50 connec Tektronix part number Signal Attenuation two required tors female BNC input male BNC 011 0059 02 output 2 Attenuator 5X Ratio 5X impedance 50 O connec Tektronix part number Signal Attenuation tors female BNC input male BNC 011 0060 02 output 3 Adapter BNC female to BNC female to Clip Leads Tektronix part number Signal Coupling for P robe Clip Leads 013 0076 00 Compensator Output Check 4 Terminator 50 O Impedance 50 connectors female Tektronix part number Signal Termination for BNC input male BNC output 011 0049 01 Channel Delay Test 5 Cable Precision 50 O 50 Q 36 in male to male BNC Tektronix part number Signal Interconnection Coaxial two required connectors 012 0482 00 6 Connector Dual Banana Female BNC to dual banana Tektronix part number Various Accuracy Tests two required 103 0090 00 7 Connec
95. 7 Delayed trigger level accuracy readout Table 4 8 Available Filters Table 4 9 Reference Receiver Filter Options Table 4 10 Option 3C and 4C Specifications not available on TDS 794D 1 1 1 4 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 15 1 16 1 16 1 17 1 20 1 22 1 22 1 23 1 24 1 26 1 27 1 30 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Table of Contents Table 4 11 Available receivers 4 92 Table 4 12 Bessel Thompson frequency response and reference receiver limitS 4 2 sl s rre REPE EE E RES S 4 100 Table 5 1 Calibration Tests 5 3 Table 5 2 Adjustments Required for Module Replaced 5 4 Table 5 3 Adjustments and Dependencies 5 4 Table 5 4 Test Equipment Fixtures and Supplies 5 5 Table 5 5 GPIB Board Configuration 5 7 Table 6 1 Relative susceptibility to static discharge damage 6 3 Table 6 2 External inspection check list 6 5 Table 6 3 Internal inspection checklist 6 6 Table 6 4 Tools Required for Module Removal 6 11 Table 6 5 Normal supply voltages measured on J26 and J27 on the A11 DRAM Processor Display module 6 64 Table 6 6 No load supply voltages measured on J5 and J6 on t
96. 700D Service Manual 4 29 Performance Tests b Set the vertical scale Set the vertical SCALE to one of the settings listed in Table 4 2 that is not yet checked Start with the first setting listed Wm Press VERTICAL MENU Press the main menu button Fine Scale m Use the keypad to enter the vertical scale For the 1 mV setting press 1 SHIFT m then ENTER For the 101 mV setting press 101 SHIFT m then ENTER For the 1 01 V setting press 1 01 then ENTER Press CLEAR MENU Table 4 2 DC offset accuracy zero setting TDS 500D 700D Vertical except TDS 794D Vertical scale position and TDS 600B offset offset accuracy setting offset setting accuracy limits limits lmV 2 1 mV 1 6 mV 101 mV 75 6 mV 25 1 mV 1 01V 756 mV 251 mV TDS 794D offset accuracy limits 10 mV 2 5 mV 101 mV 0 25 1 mV 1 Vertical position is set to 0 divisions and vertical offset to 0 V when the oscilloscope is initialized in step 1 c Display the test signal The waveform position and offset were initialized for all channels in step 1 and are displayed as you select each channel and its vertical scale d Measure the test signal Align the active cursor over the waveform by rotating the general purpose knob Ignore the other cursor See Figure 4 4 e Read the measurement results at the absolute cursor readout not the delta A readout on screen That is read the offset relative to the ground reference
97. 784D CIRCUIT BD ASSY ACQUISITION LONG TDS580D amp 784D CIRCUIT BD ASSY ACQUISITION SHORT TDS794D CIRCUIT BD ASSY ACQUISITION LONG TDS794D GASKET RF SHIELDING FLEX CIRCUIT TEK PROBE INTERFACE BRACKET CKT BD PLASTIC BRACKET CKT BD PLASTIC Mfr code OKBO1 5Y921 TK2469 80009 80009 80009 0 9P9 07416 24931 80009 TK1163 0 9P9 00779 30817 OKBO1 03LB0 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 0 9P9 TK2597 TK1163 TK1163 Mfr part number ORDER BY DESC JQ24F4V 031349 174 2349 00 671 4172 00 671 4171 00 671 3693 00 ORDER BY DESC 334 7966 02 28 R306 1 679 2437 00 ORDER BY DESC 386 6182 00 205818 2 0098 0564 09 03 ORDER BY DESC SDP 3B175 101 407 4486 00 671284700 671284800 671 4165 00 671 4166 00 671 4493 00 671 4492 00 671 4167 00 671 4168 00 671 3314 00 671 3462 01 671 4163 00 671 4164 00 671 4161 00 671 4162 00 348 1422 00 259010102 ORDER BY DESC ORDER BY DESC TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Mechanical Parts List Replaceable Parts List Cont Fig amp index Tektronix Serial no number part number effective 21 441 1901 03 407 3877 00 407 3878 00 22 671 4050 00 23 671 4095 00 Serial no discontd Qty Name amp description CHASSIS SCOPE TOP ATTACHED PARTS BRACKET CKT B
98. 9A 10X 500 MHz Passive probes TDS 580D TDS 680B TDS 684B TDS 784D TDS 794D No probes standard Front Cover 200 3696 01 Accessory Pouch TDS 644B TDS 684B TDS 700D 016 1268 00 U S Power Cord 161 0230 01 7 4 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Options and Accessories Optional Accessories You can also order the optional accessories listed in Table 7 3 Table 7 3 Optional accessories Accessory Part number Service Manual 071 0136 XX Oscilloscope Cart K420 Rack Mount Kit for field conversion 016 1236 00 Accessory Pouch TDS 500D TDS 620B TDS 680B 016 1268 00 Soft Sided Carrying Case 016 0909 01 Transit Case 016 1135 00 GPIB Cable 1 meter 012 0991 01 GPIB Cable 2 meter 012 0991 00 Centronics Cable 012 1214 00 RS 232 Cable 012 1298 00 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 7 5 Options and Accessories Accessory Probes each probe follow the table Table 7 4 Recommended Probe Cross Reference Table 7 4 lists the recommended probes for each oscilloscope Descriptions of Probe 520D 580D 620B 680B 724D 784D 794D 540D 644B 684B 754D Specialty P6339A 10X Passive P6101B P6101B P6101B P6101B P6101B P6101B 1X 10X P6139A P6139A P6139A P6139A P6139A P6139A 100X P5100 P5100 P5100 P5100 P5100 P5100 1000X P6015A P6015A P6015A P6015A P6015A P6015A SMD P6563A P6563A P6563A P6563A P6563A P6563A Low Capacitance P6158 P6158 P6158
99. ALE to 500 mV Set the horizontal SCALE to 100 ns Push SET LEVEL TO 50 as required to trigger the signal Press SHIFT Then press ACQUIRE MENU Press the main menu button Mode Then press the side menu button Average 16 Press MEASURE Press the main menu button Hi Low Setup Then press the side menu button Min Max Press the main menu button Select Measrmnt for Ch Repeatedly press the side menu button more until Pk Pk appears in the side menu Press the side menu button Pk Pk Press CLEAR MENU TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Adjustment Procedures 2 Confirm that the Probe Compensator signal is within limits for bandwidth a Display and measure the test signal m Monitor the CH 1 Pk Pk readout while you set the output of the generator for a 3 0 V 6 division 6 MHz reference signal m Set the horizontal SCALE to 1 ns and set the frequency of the generator to 500 MHz W Read the measurement results at the CH 1 Pk Pk readout on screen b Check against limits CHECK that the CH 1 Pk Pk readout is greater than or equal to 2 1 V 3 Disconnect the hookup a Unplug the probe from BNC to probe tip adapter b Ifsubstep 2b was passed the probe adjustment is finished Reverse the instructions in Figure 5 5 page 5 13 to reinstall the retractable hook probe tip Ifsubstep 2b was not passed leave the probe tip exposed Remove the probe from CH 1 and go on to the next procedure Adjust t
100. As stated above this section lists only warranted characteristics A list of typical characteristics starts on page 1 27 Performance Conditions The performance limits in this specification are valid with these conditions m The oscilloscope must have been calibrated adjusted at an ambient tempera ture between 4 20 C and 30 C m The oscilloscope must be in an environment with temperature altitude humidity and vibration within the operating limits described in these specifications m The oscilloscope must have had a warm up period of at least 20 minutes m The oscilloscope must have had its signal path compensation routine last executed after at least a 20 minute warm up period at an ambient temperature within 5 C of the current ambient temperature TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 1 19 Warranted Characteristics Table 1 10 Warranted characteristics Signal acquisition system Name Description Accuracy DC Gain TDS 600B 1 5 for all sensitivities from 2 mV div to 10 V div tX 2 095 at 1 mV div sensitivity TDS 500D 700D 1 for all sensitivities from 1 mV div to 10 V div with offset from 0 V to 100V TDS 794D 1 for all sensitivities from 10 mV div to 1 V div over permitted offset range Accuracy DC Voltage Measurement Measurement type DC Accuracy Averaged using Average mode Average of gt 16 waveforms TDS 600B 1 5 x reading Net Offset Offset Accuracy 0 06 div
101. BE COMPENSATION signal to display defective a defective channel s BNC on the front of the waveforms oscilloscope and swap these two channels coaxes to the A10 Acquisition module For all the channels is the signal on the display a 1 kHz 0 250 V square wave The Acquisition Attenuator Interface is ok Attach the PROBE COMPENSATION signal to the CH 1 BNC on the front of the oscilloscope Remove the coax connector from J 1400 on the A10 Acquisition module Is a 1 kHz 0 250 V square wave displayed now Replace the A10 Acquisition module the detached end of the coax Is there a 1 kHz 0 250 V square wave on the coax Power the oscilloscope off and disconnect the cable attached to J 1153 on the A10 Acquisition module Power on and probe J 1153 pins 14 16 18 and 20 Probe J 700 but DO NOT Are these REMOVE the cable from the pins 415 V 45 V connector The voltages will 16 and 8 Are these Power Supply 5 1 V and 15 V change if the A10 Acquisition pins 15 V 5 V troubleshooting respectively module is not connected to 5 1 V and 15 V procedure the power supply respectively Yes While turning the vertical SCALE knob does J 1153 pin 22 pulse swing between 45 V and While turning the vertical SCALE knob again does J 1153 pin 26 swing between 45 V turning the vertical SCALE knob does
102. CQUIRE MENU Press the main menu button Mode Then press the side menu button Average 16 Push SET LEVEL TO 50 as required to trigger the signal Advance the horizontal SCALE to 5 ns Press HORIZONTAL MENU Press the main menu button Trigger Position press the side menu button Set to 20 Press SAVE WAVEFORM Press the main menu button Save Waveform Then press the side menu button To Ref 1 Press MORE Then push the main menu button Ref 1 Display the test signal Disconnect the tunnel diode pulser at CH 1 and remove the 10X attenuator Connect the output of the tunnel diode pulser through a BNC fe male to BNC female adapter to a BNC to probe tip adapter Install the probe on CH 1 Plug the probe tip from the probe into the BNC to probe tip adapter Press VERTICAL then press CH 1 Press the main menu button Coupling Then press the side menu button Q to toggle to 1 MQ coupling Push SET LEVEL TO 50 as required to trigger the signal Adjust the triggering level of the tunnel diode pulser until a five to six division square wave appears on screen Do not advance the knob any further than required to achieve stable amplitude Make the adjustments Locate the various adjustments in Figure 5 9 Manually adjust the front corner response of the probe to best match the response of the Ref 1 waveform It is more important to match the response during the first 5 ns than during the entire first 20 ns the adju
103. D 700D 25 ppm over any 21 ms interval Table 1 12 Warranted characteristics Triggering system Name Description Sensitivity Trigger Coupling Trigger source Sensitivity set to DC Any Channel TDS 620B amp 644B 0 35 division from DC to 50 MHz increasing to 1 division at 500 MHz TDS 680B amp 684B 0 35 division from DC to 50 MHz increasing to 1 division at 1 GHz TDS 500D 724D amp 754D 0 35 division from DC to 50 MHz increasing to 1 division at 500 MHz TDS 580D amp 784D 0 35 division from DC to 50 MHz increasing to 1 division at 1 GHz TDS 794D 0 35 division from DC to 50 MHz increasing to 1 division at 1 5 GHz Auxiliary TDS 600B 250 mV from DC to 50 MHz increasing to 500 mV at 100 MHz TDS 500D 724D amp 754D 400 mV from DC to 50 MHz increasing to 750 mV at 100 MHz TDS 580D amp 784D 250 mV from DC to 50 MHz increasing to 500 mV at 100 MHz TDS 794D 250 mV from DC to 50 MHz increasing to 500 mV at 100 MHz Width Minimum Pulse and Rearm for For vertical settings 10 mV div and lt 1 V div at the BNC input Pulse Triggering Minimum pulse The minimum pulse widths and rearm Pulse class width Minimum re arm width widths and transition times required for Glitch 1ns 2 ns 5 of Glitch Width Setting Pulse Type triggering Time Qualified 2 ns TDS 700D 8 5 ns 5 of Width Setting Runt Width lns 2 ns 5 of Width Upper Limit Setting Timeout lns 2 ns 5 of Width Upper Limit S
104. D PLASTIC BRACKET CKT BD PLASTIC CIRCUIT BD ASSY PCMCIA OPTIONAL ON TDS 500D 700D CIRCUIT BD ASSY OPTION CONNECTOR BD TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Mfr code 0 9P9 TK1163 TK1163 80009 80009 Mfr part number ORDER BY DESC ORDER BY DESCRIPTION ORDER BY DESCRIPTION 671 4050 00 671 4095 00 10 9 Mechanical Parts List Figure 10 2 Outer chassis modules 10 10 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Mechanical Parts List Replaceable Parts List Fig amp index Tektronix Serial no Serial no number part number effective discont d 3 1 640 0077 11 640 0071 06 378 0366 01 386 6211 02 2 348 1300 00 3 620 0063 05 4 441 2043 00 5 386 5871 01 Qty amp description DISPLAY MODULE TDS FAMILY FULL COLOR A30 TDS 644B 684B amp 700D ONLY DISPLAY MONOCHR 7 INCH A20 TDS 520B 540B 620B amp 680B ONLY FILTER LT CRT 6 525 X 5 225 ESP EMC TDS 520B 540B 620B amp 680B ONLY RETAINER FILTER DUST SEAL ASSY LEXAN TDS 520B 540B 620B amp 680B ONLY SHLD GSKT ELEK 3 165 L CLIP ON POWER SUPPLY 400W 5V 12A 5 1V 22A 15V 1 5A A16 CHASSIS SCOPE MAIN 0 05 ALUMINUM SUBPANEL FRONT FINIS HED ALUMINUM TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Mfr code 80009 80009 11536 TK1163 30817 1GM54 0 9P9 5Y 400 Mfr part number 640 0077 11 640 0071 06 378 0366 01 386 6211 02 0
105. D Service Manual Er aS SS Operating Instructions Screen Layout Basic Procedures How to Power On AN Before doing service read the following operating instructions These instruc tions are at the level appropriate for servicing these oscilloscopes The User Manual contains more complete operating instructions Additional instructions are integrated into the service procedures found in later sections of this manual For instance the procedures found in the section Performance Verification contain instructions for making the front panel settings required to check each instrument characteristic included there Also the general instructions for operating these oscilloscopes internal diagnostic routines are found in Section 6 Maintenance You may also find the Product Description in Section 1 useful for understanding how the oscilloscope functions Figure 2 1 on page 2 8 shows the screen layout This figure illustrates a full graticule You may also select a grid crosshair or frame graticule from the display menu Push the principal power switch found on the rear panel of the oscilloscope then push the ON STBY standby switch to toggle the oscilloscope into operation The switch at the rear panel is the true power disconnect switch The ON STBY standby switch simply toggles operation on and off WARNING The principal power switch at the rear panel is the true power disconnect switch The ON STBY standby switch simply t
106. DE SEE FIGURE 10 1 3 STRAP WRIST 3M TYPE 2214 ADJ 6 FT COILED CORD TDS794D ONLY COVER ELEC CONN BNC COVER MALE STR W O INSERT NON SHORTING TDS794D ONLY MANUAL TECH PROGRAMMER HELP DISK MANUAL TECH USERS MANUAL TECH USERS OPT L5 APANESE MANUAL TECH USERS OPT L1 FRENCH MANUAL TECH USERS OPT L3 GERMAN MANUAL TECH USERS OPT L9 KOREAN MANUAL TECH PERF VERIF MANUAL TECH REFERENCE SET COVER FRONT PLASTIC SEE FIG 10 1 14 POUCH ACCESSORY DATA SHEET INSTALLING THE ACCESSORY POUCH INSTRUCTION TDS TLS FAMILIES DP TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Mfr code 3109 3109 3109 2W733 3109 0 R05 TK0623 91836 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 TK2539 TK2548 Mfr part number 198 010 198 010 209010 ORDER BY DESC ORDER BY DESC ORDER BY DESC 400 1829 KC89 58 TR 5 063 2773 xx 071 0130 xx 071 0134 071 0131 xx 071 0132 xx 071 0133 071 0135 xx 020 2235 xx 2122 PER TEK P N 10 19 Mechanical Parts List Figure 10 7 Accessories Replaceable Parts List Fig amp index Tektronix Serial no Serial no number part number effective discontd Qty amp description OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 003 1457 01 1 BIT TORX DRIVER MODIFY THE T 20 012 0991 00 1 CABLE INTCON SHLD CMPST GPIB 012 0991 01 1 CABLE GPIB LOW EMI 1 METER 012 1214 00 1 CABL
107. E INTCON SHLD CMPST IBM TO PRINTER 012 1298 00 1 CABLE INTCON RS232C DB25M DB9F SERIAL 012 1388 00 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY OSCILLOSCOPE SECURITY 016 0909 01 1 CASE CARRYING SOFTSIDED FOR 3002C 016 1135 00 1 CASE CARRYING 26 X 22 X 15 HARD TRANSFER 016 1145 00 1 HOOD ASSEMBLY TDS SERIES 016 0099 00 1 HDW KIT ELEK EQ RACKMOUNTING HDW 071 0136 xx 1 MANUAL TECH SERVICE 070 8432 xx 1 MANUAL TECH INSTR TDS FAMILY RACKMOUNT Mfr code TK1465 22526 00779 6D224 TK2500 80009 TK2162 34416 80009 80009 80009 TK2548 Mfr part number 003 1457 01 81190 020 553577 2 2206 C294 9 012 1388 00 0587 2622RW 7T 7B 016 1145 00 016 0099 00 071 0136 xx PER TEK P N 10 20 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual
108. INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Table of Contents General Safety Summary Service Safety Preface serena on A ey HGR SOLES Manial Structure tities ile tae cea Rec See osten SRS Manual Conventions 0 cece cc teenies Related nu fda a ee ee Contacting Tektronix ccc cect n Introduction 5 eee br els aie t her tee Se aie wisi Se tie aen n e Service Strategy i nne a e o we Ere eei a e AE RR M pe ar Service Offerings cvs uve UR bargin I EAR AE RE ee Before You Begin E Specifications Specifications 2 ere er hehe oie dose rer V LER reed Product Descriptions s ok See te eR E ERROR TR UOS User Interfaces or a s o ALL BE ERREUR E Ea o ges Signal Acquisition System Horizontal System seas cu ate o ac b aia APER EATER HRS Trigger Systeme scsi sh te shee E o Eo OBAT D E a p ce es Acquisition Control 2 ee otc b RATER WAR eS On Board User Assistance Measurement Assistance eee cee re SIOrAge ataca Ru she ERU suis hee cl RU RE o UC D ER
109. ISPLAY ey DD S pecial function controls CAUTOSET Access all functions except vertical horizontal and STATUS trigger functions from this front panel control block AEN VERTICAL A HORIZONTAL ZEB TRIGGER CH1 a POSITION 4 ad MAIN LEVEL O TRIG D C M k m CH2 READY DELAYED TRIG VERTICAL 2509 HORIZONTAL TRIGGER D E F me A SCALE dem SCALE gt SET LEVEL CG WV TO 50 A B eus SINGLE TRIG x ENTER Co PROBE COMPENSATION SIGNAL GND 205 ADJUST PROBE kHz SL AT ims CH 4 T0pF CH2 sov AMS CH3 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 2 9 Operating Instructions 2 10 2 Select the waveform source s Position scale and set trigger level for waveform source s directly from the front panel The steps that follow provide examples of possible control selections SAVE RECALL APPLICATION ACQUIRE AUTOSET WAVEFORM MEASURE HARDCOPY CRUN SWP SELECT STATUS UTILITY SHIFT HELP CURSOR DISPLAY AES VERTICAL B HORIZONTAL AB TRIGGER C CH1 4 MAIN LEVEL CAL HORIZONTAL TRIGGER n VERTI CoD CD D E 2 A SCALE aa SET LEVEL 2 8 lt 7 50 L Cy wu X ENTER SINGLE TRIG FORCE TRIG lt
110. NTS files b Insert your working disk in a floppy drive change to that drive and type install The software will ask you to specify the hard disk on which to install the adjustment software It will also prompt you to specify several GPIB card configuration parameters The adjustment software will be installed in a directory called TDS600B ADJ or TDS700D ADJ on your hard drive 3 Store your installation disks Remove your working disk and store it and the master disk in a secure place TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 5 7 Adjustment Procedures Software Based Equipment All items that are listed for Software based Adjustments under the Adjustments required Purpose column in Table 5 4 starting on page 5 5 If you intend to perform the adjustments for Options 3C and 4C you also need the equipment listed for Option 3C and 4C software based adjustments 1 Hook up the oscilloscope a Connect the GPIB cable Item 7 to the GPIB port at the computer rear panel When multiple GPIB cards are installed connect to the GPIBO card b Connect the GPIB cable Item 7 to the GPIB port at the oscilloscope rear panel Power on the oscilloscope 2 Set up the oscilloscope a Press SHIFT then press UTILITY b Repeatedly press the main menu button System until I O is highlighted in the pop up menu c Press the side menu button TALK LISTEN d Use the keypad to set any address between 0 and 29
111. OUTH 1800 NW 169TH PL SUITE B 300 ED SNYDER BLDG 38 302 15 F 1 FU SHING N ROAD 3000 LEWIS amp CLARK WAY SUITE 2 6370 NANCY RIDGE DR SUITE 109 315 SOUTH MONTGOMERY PO BOX 2231 14181 SW MILLIKAN WAY 1521 POPLAR LANE 140 CASPIAN COURT 3000 LEWIS AND CLARK HWY PO BOX 737 403 NORTH MAIN 810 SE SHERMAN 5750 NE MOORE COURT 2800 FULLING MILL PO BOX 3608 3191 CASITAS 7 INDUSTRIAL WAY 7575 MARKET PLACE DR 11866 SLATER AVE NE 2789 NORTHPOINT PARKWAY 2200 US HIGHWAY 27 SOUTH PO BOX 1980 857 OLD TRAIL RD 2100 EARLYWOOD DR PO BOX 547 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual City state zip code SUMMERSET NJ 08873 KWAI CHUNG N T HONG KONG WILSONVILLE OR 97070 HILLSBORO OR 97123 TIGARD OR 97223 HILLSBORO OR 97124 6629 SOUTH BEND IN 46614 9696 BEAVERTON OR 97006 BEAVERTON OR 97077 TAIPEI TAIWAN ROC VANCOUVER WA 98601 SAN DIEGO CA 92121 SHERMAN TX 75091 2231 BEAVERTON OR 97077 FOREST GROVE OR 97116 SUNNYVALE CA 94089 VANCOUVER WA 98661 2999 NEWBERG OR 97132 PORTLAND OR 97214 4657 HILLSBORO OR 97124 6474 HARRISBURG PA 17105 LOS ANGELES CA 90039 2410 SALEM NH 03079 EDEN PRAIRIE MN 55344 3637 KIRKLAND WA 98034 SANTA ROSA CA 95407 RICHMOND IN 47375 0010 ETTERS PA 17319 FRANKLIN IN 46131 10 3 Mechanical Parts List Manufacturers Cross Index Cont Mfr code 30817 34416 5Y400 50356 52152 53387 6D224 61857 61935 15915 800
112. P6158 3 0 GHz 20x 1 KQ low capacitance probe m P6139A 10X 500 MHz Passive probe m P6339A 500 MHz buffered passive AC DC coupling 20 150 MHz bandwidth limit probe for TDS 794D m P6217 Active high speed digital voltage probe FET DC to 4 GHz DC offset m P6204 Active high speed digital voltage probe FET DC to 1 GHz DC offset m P6563A Passive SMD probe 20X 500 MHz TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 7 7 Options and Accessories 7 8 P5100 High Voltage Passive probe 2 5 kV DC to 250 MHz P6015A High Voltage probe 40 kV peak 75 MHz P5205 High Voltage differential probe 1 3 kV differential DC to 100 MHz P5210 Differential high voltage probe 5 6 kV DC peak AC 50 MHz ADA 400A differential preamp switchable gain AM 5038 DC AC 50 MHz Current measurement system AC DC Supplied with A6302 Current Probe AM 503S Option 03 DC AC 100 A Current measurement system AC DC Supplied with A6303 Current Probe AM 503S Option 05 DC AC 100 MHz Current measurement system Supplied with A6312 Current Probe TCP 202 Current Probe DC to 50 Mhz 15 A DC P6021 AC Current probe 120 Hz to 60 MHz P6022 AC Current probe 935 kHz to 120 MHz CT 1 Current probe designed for permanent or semi permanent in circuit installation 25 kHz to 1 GHz 50 Q input CT 2 Current probe designed for permanent or semi permanent in circuit installation 1 2 kHz to 200 MHz 50 Q input CT 4 Current Transforme
113. Processor Display board contains both the processor and display systems Display System Text and waveforms are processed by different parts of the display circuitry The display system sends the text and waveform information to the tube assembly as a video signal The display system also generates and sends vertical VSYNC and horizontal HSYNC sync signals to the tube assembly A VGA compatible video output is at the rear of the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D All information waveforms text graticules and pictographs is displayed by the A30 31 32 Display system The A30 generates the high voltages necessary to drive the display tube It also contains the video amplifier horizontal oscillator and the vertical and horizontal yoke driver circuitry TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Theory of Operation Front Panel The processor system sends instructions to and receives information from the Front Panel Processor on the A12 Front Panel board The Front Panel Processor reads the front panel switches and potentiometers Any changes in their settings are reported to the processor system The Front Panel Processor also turns the LEDs on and off and generates the bell signal Front panel menu switches are also read by the Front Panel Processor The processor sends any changes in menu selections to the processor system The ON STBY switch is one of the menu switches However it is not read by the Front Panel Processor but pas
114. SSY SP ELEC 50 28 AWG 5 85 L F LAT CA ASSY SP RIBBON IDC 26 28 AWG 6 0 L OPTION 05 CABLES CABLE ASSY COAX RFP 50 OHM 9 2224 L CA ASSY SP RIBBON OPTION 05 AND PCMCIA IDC 28 AWG 2X25 5 15L CA ASSY SP RIBBON OPTION 05 AND PCMCIA IDC 28AWG 2X20 5 15L TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Mfr code TK2469 TK2469 TK0588 TK2469 00779 0KB05 53387 53387 53387 80009 TK2469 TK2469 Mfr part number ORDER BY DESC ORDER BY DESC ORDER BY DESC ORDER BY DESC 205818 2 346 0266 00 174 3736 00 174 3735 00 ORDER BY DESC 174 0655 00 174 3728 00 174 3729 00 10 15 Mechanical Parts List Figure 10 5 Cables top view 10 16 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Mechanical Parts List Replaceable Parts List Fig amp index Tektronix Serial no Serial no number part number effective discont d 6 1 407 4460 01 2 211 0840 xx 3 211 0730 00 4 174 2964 00 55 276 0849 xx 6 407 4230 01 7 337 3935 01 8 119 5677 01 950 4827 xx Qty Name amp description 1 2 2 FDD NOISE SHIELD DISK DRIVE TOP 0 014 80 NICKEL SCREW MACHINE M2 6 X 0 45MM PITCH X 4 0 L SCR ASSEM WSHR 6 32 X 0 375 PNH STL WIRE ELECTRICAL FLAT FLEX UMPER CORE EM EMI SUPPRESS RBN CA BRKT DISK DRIVE ALUMINUM SHLD DISK DRIVE DISK DRIVE FLOPPY 3 5 INCH 2MB 0 5 INH DSDD SCREW PHIL M 2 5 X 8 CSK TDS 500D TDS 600B a
115. See Figure 4 4 f Check against limits Do the following subparts in the order listed m CHECK that the measurement results are within the limits listed for the current vertical scale setting 4 30 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests W Enter voltage on test record m Repeat substeps b through f until all vertical scale settings listed in Table 4 2 are checked for the channel under test n x Tek Run 100k8 s Average Read the measurement 2 results Align the active cursor over the waveform OOIOIO ODIO OV 23 Feb 1994 09 36 18 M so gs Chl 7 ICOICOICOICOICOICOSICO Figure 4 4 Measurement of DC offset accuracy at zero setting TDS 684B shown g Test all channels Repeat substeps a through f for all input channels TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 31 Performance Tests Check DC Voltage Measurement Accuracy WARNING The generator is capable of outputting dangerous voltages Be sure to N set the DC calibration generator to 0 volts before connecting disconnecting and or moving the test hookup during the performance of this procedure Also check that the calibrator does not have shorting straps installed between the DC and sense outputs or grounds Two dual banana connectors Item 6 One BNC T connector Item 7 One DC calibrat
116. Service Manual Tektronix TDS 500D TDS 600B amp TDS 700D Digitizing Oscilloscopes 071 0136 00 ce Warning The servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid personal injury do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so Refer to the Safety Summary prior to performing service Copyright Tektronix Inc All rights reserved Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved Printed in the U S A Tektronix Inc P O Box 1000 Wilsonville OR 97070 1000 TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc FlexFormat and KlipChip are trademarks of Tektronix Inc WARRANTY Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three 3 years from the date of shipment If any such product proves defective during this warranty period Tektronix at its option either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product In order to obtain service under this warranty Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shippi
117. TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Adjustment Procedures b Ifthese settings conflict with your hardware setup see your GPIB card manual for alternate settings If you have more than one GPIB card installed this adjustment software assumes the first card referenced 0 See your GPIB card manual for information on how to determine which card is your 0 card Table 5 5 GPIB Board Configuration Board Settings GPIB PCII GPIB PCIIA Base 1 0 Address hex 2B8 2E1 Interrupt Line 7 DMA Channel 1 1 Systems using the combination card GPIB PCII IIA can be configured as either a GPIB PCII or a GPIB PCIIA preferred Software Installation STOP ALWAYS use this installation procedure when installing this software on a new computer This installation program uses parameters you supply see step 2 substep b to create a custom start up file on your hard disk directory After installation the software will instruct you to run this start up batch file whenever you do software based adjustments so it can configure your computer properly before it runs the adjustment program Do not simply copy the software files from one computer to another since the start up batch file you copy may not match the computer you copy it to 1 Create a working disk Using the proper DOS commands copy the Adjust ment Software disk to a working disk 2 Install the software to the hard disk a Read the README and RELEASE
118. Triggering system cont Name Description Setup Hold Time Violation Trigger For vertical settings 10 mV div and x 1 V div at the BNC input Minimum Clock Pulse Widths the minimum requirements are Minimum Pulse Width Minimum Pulse Width Clock High Clock Low User Hold Time 2 5 ns 9 2 ns Input Signal Sync Amplitude for Stable All field selections 0 6 division to 4 divisions Triggering HDTV and FLEXFMT modes Option 05 Video Trigger J itter for HDTV mode 17 5 Option 05 Video Trigger Sync Width Flex Format and HDTV min 400 ns modes Option 05 Video Trigger Sync Duty Cycle Flex Format and HDTV 50 to 1 modes Option 05 Video Trigger Hum Rejection NTSC and PAL 20 dB without any trigger spec deterioration Triggering will continue Option 05 Video Trigger down to 0 dB with some performance deterioration 1 1 32 The trigger position errors are typically less than the values given here These values are for triggering signals having a slew rate at the trigger point of 0 5 division ns The waveform interval WI is the time between the samples in the waveform record Also see the footnote for the characteristics Sample Rate Range or Interpolated Waveform Rates in Table 1 4 on page 1 12 The minimum sensitivity for obtaining a stable trigger A stable trigger results in a uniform regular display triggered on the selected slope The trigger point must not switch between oppos
119. UTION indicates a hazard to property including the product Symbols on the Product The following symbols may appear on the product A AN m WARNING Protective Ground CAUTION Double High Voltage Earth Terminal Refer to Manual Insulated TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual P X il Service Safety Summary Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures Read this Service Safety Summary and the General Safety Summary before performing any service procedures Do Not Service Alone Do not perform internal service or adjustments of this product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present Disconnect Power To avoid electric shock disconnect the mains power by means of the power cord or if provided the power switch Use Caution When Servicing the CRT To avoid electric shock or injury use extreme caution when handling the CRT Only qualified personnel familiar with CRT servicing procedures and precautions should remove or install the CRT CRTs retain hazardous voltages for long periods of time after power is turned off Before attempting any servicing discharge the CRT by shorting the anode to chassis ground When discharging the CRT connect the discharge path to ground and then the anode Rough handling may cause the CRT to implode Do not nick or scratch the glass or subject it to undue pressure when removing or installing it When handling
120. V div Not Applicable DC 500 MHz DC 500 MHz DC 500 MHz DC 450 MHz 6243 DC 500 MHz P 6245 Analog Bandwidth DC 50 Coupled with P6245 Probe and Bandwidth selection is FULL TDS 580D amp TDS 784D Analog Bandwidth DC 50 Coupled with P6217 Probe TDS 794D Analog Bandwidth DC 1 MQ Coupled with P6139A Probe and Bandwidth selection is FULL TDS 520D 540D 580D 724D 754D amp 784D Volts Div as read out on screen 10 V div 100 V div 100 mV div 10 V div 50 mV div 99 5 mV div 20 mV div 49 8 mV div 10 mV div 19 9 mV div TDS 580D amp TDS 784D Not Applicable DC 1GHz DC 750 MHz DC 600 MHz DC 500 MHz Volts Div as read out on screen TDS 794D 100 mV div 10 V div DC 2GHz Volts Div as read out on screen 10 V div 100 V div 100 mV div 10 V div 50 mV div 99 5 mV div 20 mV div 49 8 mV div 10 mV div 19 9 mV div TDS 520D 540D 724D 754D amp 784D Bandwidth 500 MHz 500 MHz 500 MHz 500 MHz 500 MHz TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 1 27 Typical Characteristics Table 1 16 Typical characteristics Signal acquisition system cont Name Description Analog Bandwidth DC 50 Coupled TDS 620 amp 6448 TDS 680B amp 684B with P6139A Probe TDS 620B amp 644B Volts Div as read out on screen Bandwidth Bandwidth and 10 vidiv 100 Vidiv NotApplicable Not Applicable TDS 600B
121. V offset 4 22 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests TDS 500D 700D Test Record cont Instrument Serial Number Certificate Number Temperature RH Date of Calibration Technician TDS 500D 700D Performance Test Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum CH2 200 mV Vert scale setting 11 6805 V 11 5195 V 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH2 1 01 V Vert scale setting 17 621V 18 379 V 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH2 1 01 V Vert scale setting 18 379 V 17 621 V 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH3 5 mV Vert scale setting 1 0355 V 1 0445 V orAX1 5Div position setting 1 V offset CH3 5 mV Vert scale setting 1 0445 V 1 0355 V orAX1 5 Div position setting 1 V offset CH3 200 mV Vert scale setting 11 5195 V 11 6805 V orAX1 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH3 200 mV Vert scale setting 11 6805 V 11 5195 V orAX1 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH3 1 01 V Vert scale setting 17 621V orAX1 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH3 1 01 V Vert scale setting 18 379 V orAX1 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH4 5 mV Vert scale setting 1 0355 V orAX2 5Div position setting 1 V offset CH4 5 mV Vert scale setting 1 0445 V orAX2 5 Div position setting 1 V offset CH4 200 mV Vert scale setting 11 5195 V 11 6805 V orAX2 5 Div position setting 10 V offset 18 379 V
122. V offset CH2 1V Vert scale setting 5 711 V 5 289 V 0 Div position setting 2 5 V offset CH3 10 mV Vert scale setting 0 5755 V 0 5845 V 5 Div position setting 5 V offset CH3 10 mV Vert scale setting 0 5845 V 0 5755 V 5 Div position setting 5 V offset CH3 200 mV Vert scale setting 45 5345 V 435 6655 V 0 Div position setting 5 V offset CH3 200 mV Vert scale setting 5 6655 V 5 5345 V 0 Div position setting 5 V offset CH3 1 V Vert scale setting 5 289 V 5 711 V 0 Div position setting 2 5 V offset CH3 1 V Vert scale setting 5 711 V 5 289 V 0 Div position setting 2 5 V offset CH4 10 mV Vert scale setting 40 5755 V 0 5845 V 5 Div position setting 5 V offset CH4 10 mV Vert scale setting 0 5845 V 0 5755 V 5 Div position setting 5 V offset CH4 200 mV Vert scale setting 5 5345 V 5 6655 V 0 Div position setting 5 V offset CH4 200 mV Vert scale setting 5 6655 V 5 5345 V 0 Div position setting 5 V offset CH4 1 V Vert scale setting 5 289 V 5 711 V 0 Div position setting 2 5 V offset CH4 1 V Vert scale setting 5 711 V 5 289 V 0 Div position setting 2 5 V offset Analog Bandwidth CH1 100 mV N A CH2 100 mV N A CH3 100 mV N A CH4 100 mV N A Delay Between Channels 50 ps TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 27 Performance Tests TDS 794D Test Record cont Instrument Serial Number Temperature R Date of Calibration ertifica
123. after which we will return it to you New Modules You may purchase replacement modules in the same way as other replacement parts TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 10 1 Mechanical Parts List Using the Replaceable Parts List This section contains a list of the mechanical and or electrical components that are replaceable for the oscilloscope Use this list to identify and order replace ment parts The following table describes each column in the parts list Parts list column descriptions Column Description 1 Figure amp Index Number Items in this section are referenced by component number 2 Tektronix Part Number Use this part number when ordering replacement parts from Tektronix 3and4 Serial Number Column three indicates the serial number at which the part was first effective Column four indicates the serial number at which the part was discontinued No entries indicates the part is good for all serial numbers 5 This indicates the quantity of parts used 6 Name amp Description An item name is separated from the description by a colon Because of space limitations an item name may sometimes appear as incomplete Use the U S Federal Catalog handbook H6 1 for further item name identification 1 Mfr Code This indicates the code of the actual manufacturer of the part Code to name and address cross reference is located after this page 8 Mfr Part Number This indicates the actual manufacturer s
124. ale horizontal scale and trigger level readouts D ES Brief status 2 508579 T Level Side menu area Readouts for Set to TTL measurements move here when CLEAR MENU Set TOrEEL is pressed 0 0 0 0 Edge Logic Mc O ame CKI agam Pop up menu Poss C100 V M20 0ms Chi gt Video Type Source Coupling Slope Level UR Ege Ch DC MM Holdott L Jae co as an on Main menu display area Readouts in lower graticule area move here when CLEAR MENU is pressed Figure 4 1 Map of display functions TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 3 Performance Verification Procedures 4 4 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual eT O J Brief Procedures Self Tests Verify Internal Adjustment Self Compensation and Diagnostics The Self Tests use internal routines to confirm basic functionality and proper adjustment No test equipment is required to do these test procedures The Functional Tests utilize the probe compensation output at the front panel as a test signal source for further verifying that the oscilloscope functions properly A probe is required to do these test procedures This procedure uses internal routines to verify that the oscilloscope functions and wa
125. amplitude is on screen See Figure 4 1 on page 4 3 to locate the readout m The vertical POSITION knob moves the signal up and down the screen when rotated m Turning the vertical SCALE knob counterclockwise decreases the amplitude of the waveform on screen turning the knob clockwise increases the amplitude and returning the knob to 200 mV returns the amplitude to about 2 5 divisions e Verify that the channel acquires in all acquisition modes Press SHIFT then press ACQUIRE MENU Use the side menu to select in turn each of the three hardware acquire modes and confirm that the following statements are true Refer to the icons at the left of each statement as you confirm those statements m Sample mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen Note that there is noise present on the peaks of the square wave Nu Peak Detect mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the noise present in Sample mode peak detected m HiRes mode TDS 500D and 700D only displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the noise that was present in Sample mode reduced TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 9 Brief Procedures 4 10 f m Envelope mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the noise displayed W Average mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the noise reduced Test all channels Repeat substeps a throug
126. and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 5 Maintenance 6 6 Table 6 3 Internal inspection check list Item Circuit boards Inspect For Loose broken or corroded solder connections Burned circuit boards Burned broken or cracked circuit run plating Repair Action Remove failed module and replace with a fresh module Resistors Burned cracked broken blis Remove failed module and tered condition replace with a fresh module Solder connections Cold solder or rosin joints Resolder joint and clean with isopropyl alcohol Capacitors Damaged or leaking cases Remove damaged module and Corroded solder on leads or replace with a fresh module from terminals the factory Semiconductors Loosely inserted in sockets Firmly seatloose semiconduc Wiring and cables Chassis Distorted pins Loose plugs or connectors Burned broken or frayed wiring Dents deformations and dam aged hardware tors Remove devices that have distorted pins Carefully straight en pins as required to fit the socket using long nose pliers and reinsert firmly Ensure that straightening action does not crack pins causing them to break off Firmly seat connectors Repair or replace modules with defective wires or cables Straighten repair or replace defective hardware Cleaning Procedure Interior To clean the oscilloscope interior do the following steps 1 Blow off dust with dry low pressure deionized air a
127. anical Parts List This section contains a list of the replaceable modules for the oscilloscope Use this list to identify and order replacement parts Parts Ordering Information Module Servicing Replacement parts are available through your local Tektronix field office or representative Changes to Tektronix instruments are sometimes made to accommodate improved components as they become available and to give you the benefit of the latest circuit improvements Therefore when ordering parts it is important to include the following information in your order m Part number m Instrument type or model number Instrument serial number Instrument modification number if applicable If you order a part that has been replaced with a different or improved part your local Tektronix field office or representative will contact you concerning any change in part number Change information if any is located at the rear of this manual Modules can be serviced by selecting one of the following three options Contact your local Tektronix service center or representative for repair assistance Module Exchange In some cases you may exchange your module for a reman ufactured module These modules cost significantly less than new modules and meet the same factory specifications For more information about the module exchange program call 1 800 TEK WIDE extension 6630 Module Repair and Return You may ship your module to us for repair
128. ase to 2 us TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests m Press VERTICAL MENU then press the main menu button Coupling Press the side menu button Q to toggle it to the 50 O setting This step is not required on the TDS 794D m Press SET LEVEL TO 50 m Use the vertical POSITION knob to center the test signal on screen m Press TRIGGER MENU then press the main menu button Mode amp Holdoff Press the side menu button Normal 2 Confirm Main and Delayed time bases are within limits for accuracies a Display the test signal m Press HORIZONTAL MENU m Set horizontal modes To do this press the main menu button Time Base Press the side menu buttons Delayed Only and Delayed Runs After Main See Figure 4 13 b Measure the test signal m Set the horizontal SCALE of the D delayed time base to 500 ns for the TDS 600B or to 100 ns for the TDS 500D 700D m If using a time mark generator align the trigger T to the center vertical graticule line by adjusting the horizontal POSITION See Figure 4 13 on page 4 48 m If using a sine wave generator align the rising edge of the sine wave on the center graticule crosshairs by adjusting the horizontal POSITION m Set delayed time to 10 000016 ms Do this on the keypad by pressing 10 000016 then SHIFT then m followed by ENTER c Check long term sample rate and delay time accuracies against limits m CHECK that the rising edge of the marker or s
129. at could cause an oscilloscope failure especially under high humidity conditions CAUTION Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents which might damage the plastics used in this oscilloscope Use only deionized water when cleaning the menu buttons or front panel buttons Use a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution as a cleaner and rinse with deionized water Before using any other type of cleaner consult your Tektronix Service Center or representative Inspection Exterior Inspect the outside of the oscilloscope for damage wear and missing parts using Table 6 2 as a guide Oscilloscopes that appear to have been dropped or otherwise abused should be checked thoroughly to verify correct operation and performance Immediately repair defects that could cause personal injury or lead to further damage to the oscilloscope TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Maintenance Table 6 2 External inspection check list Item Inspect For Repair Action Cabinet front panel and Cracks scratches deformations Repair or replace defective cover damaged hardware or gaskets module Front panel knobs Missing damaged or loose Repair or replace missing or knobs defective knobs Connectors Broken shells cracked insulation Repair or replace defective and deformed contacts Dirt in modules Clear or wash out dirt connectors Carrying handle bail Correct operation Repair or replace defective cabinet feet
130. ay board c Remove the 6 screws securing the rear chassis to the main chassis and the two screws securing it to the low voltage power supply shield d Liftthe rear chassis up slightly to access the cables connected to it Disconnect those cables from CH 3 SIGNAL OUT at J1201 AUX TRIG IN at J1550 MAIN TRIG OUT at J1000 DELAYED TRIG OUT at J1001 all found on the acquisition board 4 Reinstallation Do in reverse order substeps 3a 3c reversing each step to reinstall the rear chassis Then see the following procedures in the order listed to complete reassembly of the oscilloscope m A14 DI Bus and Analog Power and Digital Power Cables page 6 28 m Rear Cover and Cabinet page 6 18 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 45 Removal and Installation Procedures DELAY TRIGGER to J 1001 MAIN TRIGGER to J 1000 AUXILIARY TRIGGER to J 1550 CH3 OUT to J 1201 EMI Gaskets Figure 6 20 Rear chassis removal 6 46 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures Procedures for Inner Chassis Modules You should have completed the Access Procedure page 6 15 before doing any of the procedures for the Inner Chassis modules The procedures are presented in the following order A16 Low Voltage Power Supply A30 Display Assembly and Supply Fuse Front Subpanel Main Chassis A16 Low Voltage Power 1 Assemble equipment and locate module
131. bility 2 Meets or exceeds the EMC requirements of the following standards EN 50082 1 European Community Requirements IEC 801 2 Electrostatic Discharge Performance Criteria IEC 801 3 Radiated S usceptibility 3 V meter from 27 MHz to 500 MHz unmodulated IEC 801 4 Fast Transients Performance Criteria B IEC 801 5 AC Surge Performance Criteria B Conforms to and is certified where appropriate to Approvals UL 3111 13 Standard for electrical measuring and test equipment CAN CSA C22 2 no 1010 13 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use 1 VGA output cable needs to be terminated if connected at all for the Instrument to meet these standards The test will pass with part CTL3VGAMM 5 The GPIB cable connected to the instrument for certain of the emissions tests must be low EMI having a high quality outer shield connected through a low impedance to both connector housings Acceptable cables are Tektronix part numbers 012 0991 00 01 02 and 03 In order to maintain the EMI performance conforming to the above regulations the following cables or their equivalent should be used a shielded Centronics cable 3 meters in length part number 012 1214 00 and a shielded RS 232 cable 2 7 meters in length CA part number 0294 9 3 UL 3111 CSA 222 no 1010 Safety Certification Compliance Temperature operating 5 to 40 C Altitude maximum operating 2000 meters Equipmen
132. btained from the factory All modules are listed in Mechanical Parts List To isolate a failure to a module use the fault isolation procedures found in Section 6 Maintenance Information To remove and replace any failed module follow the instructions in Removal and Installation Procedures also found in Section 6 Tektronix provides service to cover repair under warranty as well as other services that may provide a cost effective answer to your service needs Whether providing warranty repair service or any of the other services listed below Tektronix service technicians trained on Tektronix products are best equipped to service your TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscopes Tektronix technicians are appraised of the latest information on improvements to the product as well as the latest new options to the product Tektronix warrants this product for three years from date of purchase excluding probes for which the warranty is one year The warranty appears after the title page and copyright page in this manual Tektronix technicians provide warranty service at most Tektronix service locations worldwide Your Tektronix product catalog lists all service locations worldwide TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual xix Introduction XX Repair or Calibration Service Self Service The following services may be purchased to tailor repair and or calibration of your TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscopes to fit y
133. c Repeat procedure to remove the remaining cap as needed push the cap s back on to reinstall TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 25 Removal and Installation Procedures 6 26 Remove the flip stand Grasp the flip stand by both sides near where it joins each flip stand foot Now compress the flip stand until the flip stand ends clear the flip stand feet to complete the removal Remove the flip stand foot or feet a Do Rear Cover and Cabinet procedure page 6 18 to gain access to inside of the cabinet b Working from inside the cabinet push the two retainers to release the flip stand foot you wish to remove and lift it away from the outside of the cabinet c Repeat procedure to remove as many of the remaining feet as needed insert the two retainers back in their slots in the cabinet and snap into place any flip stand foot removed Reinstallation If any flip stand feet were removed reinstall as directed in step then see Rear Cover and Cabinet procedure page 6 18 to reinstall the rear cover and cabinet Do in reverse order steps 3 and 5 reversing each step to reinstall the flip stand then the handle caps if removed then the handle TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures Push down to flex handle and flatten against cabinet then pull it out Handle Cap Removal Handle R emoval Flip Stand Removal
134. ce Manual 6 71 Troubleshooting 6 72 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Options and Accessories Options This section describes the various options as well as the standard and optional accessories that are available for the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscope Tektronix will ship the options shown in Table 7 1 Table 7 1 Options Option Label Description Al Universal European 220 V 50 Hz power cord power cord A2 UK power cord 240 V 50 Hz power cord A3 Australian power cord 240 V 50 Hz power cord A4 North American power 240 V 60 Hz power cord cord A5 Switzerland powercord 220 V 50 Hz power cord 05 Video trigger Oscilloscope comes with tools for investigating events that occur when a video signal generates a horizontal or vertical sync pulse These tools allow investigation of a range of NTSC PAL SECAM and high definition TV signals Option is not available on the TDS 794D 13 RS 232 Centronics Hard Add RS 232 C and Centronics interface ports copy Interface Ports Option applies to TDS 500D only 16 1 GS s maximum Limit sample rate to 1 GS s maximum Option applies to TDS 540D and TDS 754D only 1K Scope cart K420 scope cart This cart can help transport the oscilloscope around many lab environ ments 24 Four passive probes Add four 500 MHz P 6139A passive probes Option applies only to TDS 600B models 26 Four active probes Add four 1 5 GHz probe only
135. cord lengths previously listed the following record lengths are available with the following options TDS 520D amp TDS 724D with option 1M l channel up to 250 000 samples 2 channels up to 130 000 samples TDS 520D amp TDS 724D with option 2M l channel up to 4 000 000 samples 2 channels up to 2 000 000 samples TDS 540D TDS 580D TDS 754D TDS 784D amp TDS 794D with option 1M l channel up to 500 000 samples 2 channels up to 250 000 samples 3or4 channels up to 130 000 samples TDS 540D TDS 580D TDS 754D TDS 784D amp TDS 794D with option 2M l channel up to 8 000 000 samples 2 channels up to 4 000 000 samples 3or4 channels 2 000 000 samples 1 Therange of real time rates expressed in samples second at which a digitizer samples signals at its inputs and stores the samples in memory to produce a record of time sequential samples Therange of waveform rates for interpolated or equivalent time on the TDS 700D waveform records 3 The Waveform Rate WR is the equivalent sample rate of a waveform record For a waveform record acquired by real time sampling of a single acquisition the waveform rate is the same as the real time sample rate for a waveform created by interpolation of real time samples from a single acquisition or on applicable products the equivalent time sampling of multiple acquisitions the waveform rate created is faster than the real time sample rate For all these cases the waveform rate
136. cquisition to the acquisition system where they are sensed and controlled Acquisition System The acquisition system amplifies the input signals samples them converts them to digital signals and controls the acquisition process under direction of the processor system The acquisition system includes the trigger acquisition timing and acquisition mode generation and control circuitry Voltage Controlled Oscillator VCO Master clocks for the acquisition system are generated by the circuitry on the A10 Acquisition board The circuitry makes up a phase locked loop The master clock is divided down by the A10 Acquisition circuitry under control of the processor system D1 Bus The acquisition system passes the digital values representing the acquired waveform through the A14 D1 Bus to the A11 DRAM Processor Dis play board This happens after a waveform acquisition is complete if the digital signal processor in the processor system requests the waveform Processor System The processor system contains a microprocessor that controls the entire instrument This system also includes the firmware and a GPIB interface You can reprogram the firmware from a remote controller using the GPIB and an external software package The processor also includes a digital signal processor This signal processor processes each waveform as directed by the system processor Waveforms and any text to be displayed are passed on to the display system The All DRAM
137. d a b Have handy a screwdriver with a size T 15 Torx tip Items 1 and 2 Locate the modules to be removed including those listed under Additional Modules Removed in the locator diagram Outer Chassis Modules Figure 6 2 page 6 13 Do the procedure A74 DI Bus and Analog Power and Digital Power Cables page 6 28 to remove the D1 bus and the interconnect cables Do the procedure Front Cover Trim Ring Menu Buttons and Attenuator Panel page 6 22 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures 2 Orient the oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope so its top is down on the work surface and its front is facing you 3 Remove the Acquisition Board Use Figure 6 18 as a guide a Disconnect the cables from CH 3 SIGNAL OUT at J1201 AUX TRIG INPUT at J1550 MAIN TRIG OUTPUT at J1000 DELAYED TRIG OUTPUT at J1001 b Ifthe option 05 video board is installed disconnect the coax cable attached to J1500 c Remove the six screws that mount the acquisition board to the main chassis the screws that mount the acquisition board to the main chassis CAUTION Use care not to damage SMT components when removing or installing d Remove the four or five front panel screws that attach the frame to the attenuator portion of the A10 Acquisition board Lift the board away from the main chassis to complete removal 4 Reinstallation Do in reverse order substeps 3a to 3d
138. d follow the instructions in the README file located on the first disk NOTE You must set the Protection switch to the unprotected position before updating the Firmware Figure 6 25 shows how to set the switch After loading the Firmware be sure you set the switch back to the protected position and cycle power If you want to order a firmware update contact your Tektronix service center Unprotected Protected Figure 6 25 Accessing the protection switch 6 58 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Troubleshooting Hard Disk Drive Maintenance Use the same procedures to maintain the oscilloscope hard disk drive that you use to maintain a hard disk drive in a personal computer The easiest procedure is to format the disk using the File Utilities Format command Format will destroy all data currently on the disk Using ScanDisk on a personal computer will attempt to fix the disk without destroying data on the disk If ScanDisk does not repair the disk replace the disk drive To use ScanDisk perform the following steps 1 Remove the hard disk drive from the oscilloscope 2 Install the hard disk drive into a Type III PCMCIA card slot 3 Power up the computer and run ScanDisk Set Scandisk to perform thorough surface scan and to automatically fix errors Using Microsoft Windows 95 select Start Programs Accessories System Tools ScanDisk W Using Microsoft Windows 3 1 exit Windows
139. d mounts securing the board above the top cover c Liftthe board up away from the oscilloscope chassis to complete the removal 5 Reinstallation a Do in reverse order steps 3 through 4 reversing the removal instructions of each step to reinstall the processor display board b See the procedures A74 D1 Bus and Analog Power and Digital Power Cables page 6 28 A23 SerPar Board page 6 30 if option 05 is TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 35 Removal and Installation Procedures installed A29 Video Trigger Board and Rear Cover and Cabinet page 6 18 to complete reassembly of the oscilloscope ja NN 37 Slide the A11 DRAM Processor Display board to 2 the rear to release it from the board mounts then lift up to complete removal ToJ2 Figure 6 15 A11 Processor display removal 6 36 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures Hard Disk Drive Option 1 Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed 2M Have handy a screwdriver with a size T 15 Torx 9 tip Items 1 and 2 b Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram Outer Chassis Modules Figure 6 2 page 6 13 c Do the procedures A74 D1 Bus and Analog Power and Digital Power Cables page 6 28 A23 SerPar Board page 6 30 if option 05 is installed A29 Video Trigger Board page 6 32 and A11 Processor Dis play Board page 6 35 to re
140. d the TDS 500D TDS 600B amp TDS 700D Reference 071 0137 XX or the TDS 500D TDS 600B amp TDS 700D User Manual 071 0130 X X These contain instructions that will acquaint you with the use of the front panel controls and the menu system TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 1 Performance Verification Procedures Input Channels vs Model When performing the procedures in this section be aware that some TDS models refer to input channels Ch 3 and Ch 4 as Aux 1 and Aux 2 respectively Where appropriate both names will appear in the procedure for example Ch 3 Aux 1 The channel names for the various TDS models are shown below TDS Model Channel Names TDS 540D 580D 644B 684B 754D 784D and 794D Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 and Ch 4 TDS 520D 620B 680B and 724D Ch 1 Ch 2 Aux 1 and Aux 2 Throughout these procedures the following conventions apply Conventions 4 2 Each test procedure uses the following general format Title of Test Equipment Required Prerequisites Procedure Each procedure consists of as many steps substeps and subparts as required to do the test Steps substeps and subparts are sequenced as follows 1 First Step a First Substep m First Subpart m Second Subpart b Second Substep 2 Second Step In steps and substeps the lead in statement in italics instructs you what to do while the instructions that follow tell you how to do it as in the example step bel
141. djustment is required Section 5 Frequency Response A frequency response adjustment is required Section 5 Error Log Errors logged are lost Reference Waveforms Waveform Lost Saved Setups Setup Lost TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Installation Repackaging Instructions Use a corrugated cardboard shipping carton having a test strength of at least 2775 pounds and with an inside dimension at least six inches greater than the instrument dimensions If the instrument is being shipped to a Tektronix Service Center enclose the following information the owner s address name and phone number of a contact person type and serial number of the instrument reason for returning and a complete description of the service required Seal the shipping carton with an industrial stapler or strapping tape Mark the address of the Tektronix Service Center and also your own return address on the shipping carton in two prominent locations Installed Options Your instrument may be equipped with one or more instrument options Except for the line cord options described by Table 2 2 on page 2 2 of this section all options and optional accessories are listed and described in Section 7 Options For further information and prices of instrument options see your Tektronix Products catalog or contact your Tektronix Field Office TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 2 5 Installation 2 6 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700
142. dvanced DSP math Add advanced DSP math features such as FFT integration and differentiation Option applies only to TDS 500D models 4D Four probes Delete the four standard probes shipped with the model Option applies only to TDS 540D TDS 644B and TDS 754D models C3 Three years calibration Provides three years of calibration C5 Five years calibration Provides five years of calibration D1 Calibration data report Oscilloscope comes with a calibration data report D3 Calibration data for C3 Provides calibration data for option C3 D5 Calibration data for C5 Provides calibration data for option C5 R5 Extended Warranty Oscilloscope comes with a 5 year extended warranty L1 Manuals in French Provides Language versions of User Manual according to option number chosen L3 Manuals in German L5 Manuals in J apanese L9 Manuals in Korean TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 7 3 Options and Accessories Standard Accessories The oscilloscope comes standard with the accessories listed in Table 7 2 Table 7 2 Standard accessories Accessory Part number User Manual 071 0130 XX Reference 020 2235 XX Technical Reference Performance Verification and Specifications 071 0135 XX Probes TDS 754D Four P6139A 10X 500 MHz Passive probes P6139A TDS 644B Four P6243 probes P6243 TDS 620B Two P6139A probes P6139A TDS 540D Four P6139A 10X 500 MHz Passive probes P6139A TDS 520D and TDS 724D P6139A Two P613
143. e making connections to the product Connect and Disconnect Properly Do not connect or disconnect probes or test leads while they are connected to a voltage source Do Not Operate Without Covers Do not operate this product with covers or panels removed Use Proper Fuse Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product Avoid Exposed Circuitry Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel Do Not Operate in Wet Damp Conditions Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Provide Proper Ventilation Refer to the manual s installation instructions for details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual xi General Safety Summary Xii Symbols and Terms A A Terms in this Manual These terms may appear in this manual WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property Terms on the Product These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CA
144. e output of the T connector to CH 1 through a 50 Q precision coaxial cable Connect the other output of the T connector to the AUX TRIG INPUT at the rear panel See Figure 4 18 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 57 Performance Tests To AUX TRIG INPUT Sine Wave on rear panel Generator Oscilloscope ERA Figure 4 18 Initial test hookup 2 Confirm Main and Delayed trigger systems are within sensitivity limits 50 MHz a Display the test signal m Set the generator frequency to 50 MHz m Press MEASURE Press the main menu button Level Setup then press the side menu button Min Max Press the main menu button Select Measrmnt for Ch m Press the side menu button more until Amplitude appears in the d side menu its icon is shown at the left Press the side menu button Amplitude m Press SET LEVEL TO 50 Wm Press CLEAR MENU m Set the test signal amplitude for about three and a half divisions on screen Now fine adjust the generator output until the CH 1 Amplitude readout indicates the amplitude is 350 mV Readout may fluctuate around 350 mV m Disconnect the 50 Q precision coaxial cable at CH 1 and reconnect it to CH 1 through a 10X attenuator b Check the Main trigger system for stable triggering at limits m Read the following definition A stable trigger is one that is consistent that is one that results in a uniform regular display triggered
145. e pulser through a 10X attenuator to CH 1 m Set the triggering level of the tunnel diode pulser to minimum 5 16 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Adjustment Procedures Calibration Generator Oscilloscope Output 10X Attenuator Tunnel Diode P ulser gt Precision Cable Figure 5 8 Initial test hookup c Initialize the oscilloscope Press save recall SETUP m Press the main menu button Recall Factory Setup Press the side menu button OK Confirm Factory Init d Modify the initialized front panel control settings m Set vertical SCALE to 5 mV m Push SET LEVEL TO 50 as required to trigger the signal m Press VERTICAL MENU Then press the main menu button Coupling Press the side menu button Q to toggle to 50 2 coupling m Press CLEAR MENU 2 Adjust the Probe a Display and store the reference signal m Set the high amplitude output of the generator to 60 V at the input to the tunnel diode pulser m Set the Period repetition rate to 10 kHz m Advance the triggering level of the tunnel diode pulser until a five to six division square wave appears on screen Do not advance the knob any further than required to achieve stable amplitude m Use the vertical POSITION to center the displayed waveform on screen TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 5 17 Adjustment Procedures 5 18 Press SHIFT then press A
146. e they provide information needed to do the service correctly and efficiently The following is a brief description of each manual section W Specifications contains a product description of the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscopes and tables of the characteristics and descrip tions that apply to it m Operating Information includes general information and operating instruc tions at the level needed to safely power on and service this oscilloscope A statement of the service strategy that this manual supports and instructions for shipment of the oscilloscopes are found in this section m Theory of Operation contains circuit descriptions that support general service and fault isolation Performance Verification contains a collection of procedures for confirming that these oscilloscopes function properly and meet warranted limits m Adjustment Procedures contains a collection of procedures for adjusting these oscilloscopes to meet warranted limits m Maintenance contains information and procedures for doing preventive and corrective maintenance of these oscilloscopes Instructions for cleaning for TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual XV Preface Manual Conventions Modules Channels Safety Symbols xvi module removal and installation and for fault isolation to a module are found here W Options contains information on servicing any of the factory installed options that may be present in you
147. e to the A11 Processor Display board b Remove the disk drive by unscrewing the two retaining Phillips screws on the sides of the disk drive Then pull out the drive TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 43 Removal and Installation Procedures Figure 6 19 Floppy disk drive removal 5 Reinstallation Do in reverse order substeps 4b then 4a to reinstall the floppy disk drive Then see the following procedures in the order listed to complete reassembly of the oscilloscope m Front Cover Trim Ring Menu Buttons and Attenuator Panel page 6 22 m Rear Cover and Cabinet page 6 18 Rear Chassis 1 Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed a Have handy a screwdriver with a size T 15 Torx tip Items 1 and 2 b Locate the modules to be removed including those listed under Additional Modules Removed in the locator diagram Outer Chassis Modules Figure 6 2 page 6 13 Install the front cover if it is not already installed 6 44 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures 2 Orient the oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the work surface and its rear is facing you 3 Remove the rear chassis Use Figure 6 20 as a guide when doing the following substeps a Unplug the GPIB interconnect cable at J35 of the processor display board b Unplug the video cable at J51 of the processor displ
148. easure Support ment product call toll free in North America 1 800 TEK WIDE 1 800 835 9433 ext 2400 6 00 a m 5 00 p m Pacific time Or contact us by e mail tm app supp tek com For product support outside of North America contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales office Service Contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales office Or visit Support our web site for a listing of worldwide service locations http www tek com For other In North America information 1 800 TEK WIDE 1 800 835 9433 An operator will direct your call To write us Tektronix Inc P O Box 1000 Wilsonville OR 97070 1000 xviii TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Introduction Service Strategy Service Offerings Warranty Repair Service STOP Throughout this manual any field replaceable component assembly or part of this oscilloscope is referred to generically as a module This manual contains all the information needed for periodic maintenance of the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscopes Examples of such information are procedures for checking performance and for readjustment Further it contains all information for corrective maintenance down to the module level This means that the procedures diagrams and other troubleshoot ing aids help isolate failures to a specific module rather than to components of that module Once a failure is isolated replace the module with a fresh unit o
149. ecom mended probe If available you may replace items 14 15 and 16 with a Tegam Tektronix SG5030 and its leveling head for bandwidths up to 500 MHz or a Tegam Tektronix SG503 and SG504 with SG504 leveling head for bandwidths up to 1 GHz TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 17 Performance Tests TDS 600B Test Record TDS 600B Test Record Photocopy this and the next three pages and use them to record the performance test results for your TDS 600B Instrument Serial Number Temperature Date of Calibration TDS 600B Performance Test C R ertificate Number H 96 Technician Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum Offset Accuracy CH1 Offset 1 mV 2 1 mV 101 mV 75 6 mV 1 01 V 756 mV CH2 Offset 1 mV 2 1 mV 101 mV 75 6 mV 1 01 V 756 mV CH3 or AX1 1 mV 2 1 mV Offset 101 mV 75 6 mV 1 01 V 756 mV or AX2 1 mV 2 1 mV Offset 101 mV 75 6 mV 1 01 V 756 mV DC Voltage Measurement Accuracy Averaged CH1 5 mV Vert scale setting 1 0329 V 1 0471 V 5 Div position setting 1 V offset CH1 5 mV Vert scale setting 1 0471 V 1 0329 V 5 Div position setting 1 V offset CH1 200 mV Vert scale setting 11 4165 V 11 7835 V 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH1 200 mV Vert scale setting 11 7835 V 11 4165 V 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH1 1 01 V Vert scale setting 17 102 V 18 899 V 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH1 1
150. ect the output of the signal generator Connect the composite signal connector of the PAL signal source labeled COMPST on the TSG 121 to a 75 Q cable and a 75 Q terminator Connect both signals to the CH1 input through a BNC T See Figure 4 33 m Press VERTICAL MENU If needed press the main menu Fine Scale W Use the keypad to set fine scale to 500 mV press 500 SHIFT m then ENTER m Connect another composite signal connector of the PAL signal source labeled COMPST on the TSG 121 through a 75 Q cable and a 75 terminator to the CH2 input See Figure 4 33 PAL signal 75 Q terminators source Oscilloscope COMPST AC foo D AYO o Signal Generator 75 O Cable Output COMPST BNC T connector 50 O cable 75 Q cable Figure 4 33 Subsequent 60 Hz Rejection test hookup m CONFIRM that the TRIG D LED stays lighted and that the waveform on screen is stable In other words be sure the waveform does not move horizontally or vertically Also confirm that the waveform on the screen has one positive pulse and a number of negative pulses See Figure 4 34 m Disconnect all test equipment from the oscilloscope 4 78 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests Tek Run 1 00MS s Sample Fine Scale 300mV WEE soomV dMso 0us Vid chi i 7 Fine Sca 5 gmv fdiv Coupling Bandwidth DC Fuil Position 0 div Offset
151. ection a Set up oscilloscope for 60 Hz Rejection Test 4 76 Use the keypad to set the Ch1 Fine Scale to 282 mV press 282 SHIFT m then ENTER Press WAVEFORM OFF Press CH2 Press VERTICAL MENU Use the keypad set the fine scale to 2 V press 2 then ENTER Press HORIZONTAL MENU TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests m Use the keypad to set the horizontal scale div to 5 ms press 5 SHIFT m then ENTER b Set up 60 Hz signal generator m Connect the output of the signal generator to the CH2 input through a 50 cable See Figure 4 31 Oscilloscope Signal Generator 50 O cable Figure 4 31 60 Hz Rejection test hookup m Adjust the signal generator for three vertical divisions of 60 Hz signal See Figure 4 32 The signal will not be triggered That is it will run free P 5 Tek Run 10 0k5 5 Sample Main Scale 3ms Horizontal j Scale Main Scale 1 50 Pts Div Delayed Scale 50 Pts Div 2 00 5 00 vid Chi if 7 eco 4 Horiz J u div LCOICOICOICOICO Figure 4 32 60 Hz Rejection test setup signal TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 77 Performance Tests c Check 60 Hz rejection m Use the keypad to set the horizontal scale div to 50 us press 50 SHIFT then ENTER m Reconn
152. eft Press the side menu button Frequency Press the side menu button more until the menu label Pk Pk appears in the side menu its icon is shown at the left Press the side menu button Pk Pk Press CLEAR MENU Set the generator output so the CHx Pk Pk readout equals the reference amplitude in Table 4 4 that corresponds to the vertical scale set in substep d Press the front panel button SET LEVEL TO 50 as necessary to trigger a stable display At full bandwidth you may also want to make small manual adjustments to the trigger level You can use the TRIGGER LEVEL knob to do this Full bandwidth varies with TDS model as is shown in Table 4 4 4 39 Performance Tests f Measure the test signal Set the frequency of the generator as shown on screen to the test frequency in Table 4 4 that corresponds to the vertical scale set in substep d See Figure 4 9 Set the horizontal SCALE to the horizontal scale setting in Table 4 4 that corresponds to the vertical scale set in substep d Press SET LEVEL TO 50 as necessary to trigger the signal Read the results at the CHx Pk Pk readout which will automatically measure the amplitude of the test signal See Figure 4 9 Tek Run 5 00GS 5 Average Read results 3 Setthe generator reference frequency to the test frequency from Table 4 4 Setthe horizontal scale 2 from Table 4 4
153. el The right cursor remains at the OC 12 data rate of 622 MHz 4 MHz the delta frequency is 584 MHz because the right cursor is no longer referenced to DC The delta attenuation from the zero dB level to the 622 MHz Cursor is 5 6 dB 6 Repeat steps 5d through 5f starting on page 4 97 moving the second cursor to twice the bit rate 1 5 times the bit rate for the FC1063 standard 7 Foran exhaustive test of the reference receiver repeat steps 5d through 5f for each frequency shown in Table 4 12 for the standard 8 If verifying additional standards repeat this procedure for each standard TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 99 Performance Tests Table 4 12 Bessel Thompson frequency response and reference receiver limits Standard Frequency MHz Lower Limit dB Nominal dB Upper Limit dB Measured A dB OC 12 SONET or STM 4 SDH Data Rate 622 08 Mb s 186 6 0 75 0 45 0 15 2799 132 102 0 72 3732 216 1 86 156 466 7 331 3 00 5 60 0 515 451 387 622 08 6 58 5 71 4 84 6532 7 35 6 37 5 39 746 5 9 86 8 54 722 839 8 1259 10 83 927 933 1 1541 1341 1141 1244 2 24 58 21 44 18 31 OC 3 SONET or STM 1 SDH Data Rate 155 52 Mb s LN 311 04 24 58 4 100 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests Table 4 12 Bessel Thompson frequency response and ref
154. elected C Set its input impedance This substep is not required on the TDS 794D m Press VERTICAL MENU then press the main menu button Coupling Press the side menu Q button to toggle it to the 50 Q setting d Set the vertical scale Set the vertical SCALE to one of the settings listed in Table 4 4 not yet checked Start with the 100 mV setting 4 38 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests Table 4 4 Analog bandwidth Test frequency TDS 580D TDS 680B Reference amplitude Horizontal TDS 684B TDS 620B Vertical scale 6 divisions scale TDS 794D TDS 784D TDS 644B 3 db Limits 100 mV 1GHz 500 MHz 2424 mV 1 mV 500 MHz 250 MHz 450 MHz 24 24 mV 2mV 600MHz 300 MHz gt 8 48 mV 5 mV 750 MHz 221 2 mV 10 mV 1GHz 242 4 mV 20 mV 1GHz 204 8 mV 50 mV 1GHz gt 212 mV 200 mV 1GHz 2048 mV 500 mV 1GHz 22 12 V1 1V 1 GHz 24 24 V1 1 If your generator cannot output 6 divisions of amplitude set it to its maximum output The 3 db limit can be calculated as 0 707 x reference amplitude e Display the test signal Do the following subparts to first display the reference signal and then the test signal TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Press MEASURE then press the main menu button Select Measrmnt for CHx Press the side menu button more if needed until the menu label Frequency appears in the side menu its icon is shown at the l
155. en doing such compute intensive tasks as interpolation waveform math and signal averaging It also teams with a custom display system to deliver specialized display modes See Display later in this description Acquired waveforms may be saved in any of four nonvolatile REF reference memories or on a 3 5 inch DOS 3 3 or later compatible disk Any or all of the saved waveforms may be displayed for comparison with the waveforms being currently acquired The Oscilloscopes instrument with option 2M can save waveforms to an internal hard disk drive Any or all of the saved waveforms may be displayed for comparison with the waveforms being currently acquired The source and destination of waveforms to be saved may be chosen You can save any of the four channels to any REF memory or move a stored reference from one REF memory to another Reference waveforms may also be written into a REF memory location via the GPIB interface The oscilloscope is fully controllable and capable of sending and receiving waveforms over the GPIB interface IEEE Std 488 1 1987 IEEE Std 488 2 1987 standard This feature makes the instrument ideal for making automated measurements in a production or research and development environment that calls for repetitive data taking Self compensation and self diagnostic features built into the oscilloscope to aid in fault detection and servicing are also accessible using commands sent from a GPIB controller The oscillosco
156. energy m Keep the impulse below 100 uW peak level because high energy impulses into the P670x probe will cause major changes in the frequency response of the probe m Set the OIG for 1 MHz internal trigger m Set the OIG for the wavelength shown in Table 4 11 that is required for the standard and option you are verifying Enable the laser Set the VERTICAL SCALE of the oscilloscope to either 10 uW 20 uW or 50 uW division NOTE These are the only scale settings for which the reference receivers have calibrated filters Set the trigger type to edge Press TRIGGER MENU then select Edge from the Type pop up menu Press SET LEVEL TO 50 Set the HORIZONTAL SCALE to 500 ps Set the Optical Attenuator for several divisions of display on the oscilloscope Set the horizontal controls m If Fit To Screen is not OFF press HORIZONTAL MENU then press Record Length Then press Fit to Screen to toggle it to the OFF setting Fit to Screen needs to be OFF so that the FFT waveform horizontal scale can be adjusted to obtain the desired display of the frequency response m To obtain a 10000 point FFT in step 3 press HORIZONTAL then press Record Length Then repeatedly press the side menu button more until 15000 appears in the side menu Press the side menu button 15000 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests m Press HORIZONTAL MENU then press the main menu button Trigger Pos
157. enever the general purpose knob assignment is changed a knob icon appears immediately to the left of the general purpose knob readout to notify you of the assignment change The icon is removed as soon as you use the general purpose knob to change the value of the function it is assigned to To assign the general purpose knob to control a function display the menu containing the function then select the function Note that not all functions can be controlled by the general purpose knob Whenever the menu is removed the general purpose knob is not assigned and doesn t control any function An exception is the cursor function If cursors are turned on removing the menu leaves the knob assigned to control the cursors until reassigned by selecting another menu and function that uses the knob When the SHIFT button is lighted the general purpose knob becomes a coarse adjustment When the SHIFT button is not lighted the general purpose knob becomes a fine adjustment The general purpose knob also has a SELECT button This button is used to toggle the knob between the control of either of the two cursors displayed when H bar or V bar cursors are turned on in the cursor menu TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Operating Instructions Display and Utility Menus Using the techniques described for using menus you can access and change functions in the display menu and utilities menu In the Display menu you can set the follo
158. entlon eu e RICE Qus EA CRUS ACAI RR RD 4 2 Brief Procedures 2 544 ees ines 80h km ERR ERR ERE iiei ss 4 5 Self Tests us oo RB RES YU REP CREE deg bee Siete eel ans 4 5 Functional Tests ieaoo ERROR RTI ON E E 4 7 Performance Tests i503 cae RR we semen TERCER RR 4 15 Prerequisites neck re Sages bal S EROS See eg ae 4 15 Equipment Required eg 4 16 TDS 600B T stRecotd PL RED RECS 4 19 TDS 500D 700D Test Record 0 eee cece nee 4 23 TDS 794D Test R cord o Lp RR ERR EIER NUS 4 26 Signal Acquisition System Checks 4 29 Time Base System Checks epenn teienei ea ce ee 4 46 Trigger System Checks ossia pe eee rper 4 49 Output Signal Checks kae EN SE Sa Sele eS 4 62 Option 05 Video Trigger Checks Not Available on TDS 794D 471 Sine Wave Generator Leveling Procedure 4 88 Optical Filters Checks TDS 500D TDS 700D Only 4 91 Adjustment Procedures Adjustment 5 1 Requirements for Performance 5 1 Usage bet REP6CBRERUMRBE RP a Mid UBPRESEehb HERES PEE tes 5 2 Equipment Required 2 0 0 0 eee ec cece eee 5 5 Adjustment Instructions 0 0 eee eee eee eee nee 5 6 Probe Adjustment
159. er Equipment DC Coupled required One sine wave generator Item 14 Two precision 50 O coaxial cables Item 5 One 10X attenuator Item 1 One BNC T connector Item 7 One 5X attenuator Item 2 Prerequisites See page 4 15 1 Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls a Initialize the oscilloscope Press save recall SETUP Press the main menu button Recall Factory Setup Press the side menu button OK Confirm Factory Init b Modify the initialized front panel control settings Set the horizontal SCALE for the M main time base to 20 ns on the TDS 600B or 25 ns on the TDS 500D 700D Press HORIZONTAL then press the main menu button Time Base Press the side menu button Delayed Only then press the side menu button Delayed Triggerable Set the horizontal SCALE for the D delayed time base to 20 ns on the TDS 600B or 25 ns on the TDS 500D 700D then press the side menu button Main Only Press TRIGGER MENU then press the main menu button Mode amp Holdoff Press the side menu button Normal Press VERTICAL MENU then press the main menu button Coupling Press the side menu button Q to select the 50 Q setting This step is not required on the TDS 794D Press SHIFT then press ACQUIRE MENU Press the main menu button Mode then press the side menu button Average 16 c Hook up the test signal source Connect the signal output of the generator to a BNC T connector Connect on
160. er Options Option 4C SONET P6703B 1300nm Option 3C Fibre Channel P6701B 850nm 52 MbitOC1 FC133 Mbit FC266 Mbit FC531 Mbit 155 MbitOC3 155 Mbit OC3 622 MbitOC12 622 Mbit OC12 FC1063 TDS 784D Only FC1063 TDS 784D Only TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 91 Performance Tests Table 4 10 Option 3C and 4C Specifications not available on TDS 794D Name Description Calibration Range Reference Receiver 10 uW per division 20 uW per division 50 uW per division Temperature Range Warranted F ilter 23 C 45 C Calibration Range Controlled Up to 2X the data rate for all filters except FC 1063 filter Up to 1 5X the data rate for FC 1063 filter Table 4 11 Available receivers Option 4C Option 3C2 TOS 500 gt mw eee eee meme e E CC nemo f pe je de de de ee Tektronix P6703B 1300 nm Optical to Electrical Converter Requires Tektronix P6701B 850 nm Optical to Electrical Converter 3 Reference receivers are warranted to 2 0 times the bit rate except for FC1063 which is warranted to 1 5 times the bit rate OC1 is type tested 4 92 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests Reference Receiver Equipment Verification required 016501 use with P 6701B Item 24 016502 use with P 6703B Item 25 Optical Attenuator 045022 Item 26 Fiber Optic Cable Item 27 Optical to Electrical Converter item 28
161. er is working correctly perform the Diagnos tics procedure on page 6 57 A11 Processor Display Additional Modules Removed D1 bus and analog and digital power cables A23 Board SerPar Board and if option 05 is installed A29 Video Trigger Board 1 Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed a Have handy a screwdriver with a size T 15 Torx tip Items 1 and 2 b Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram Outer Chassis Modules Figure 6 2 page 6 13 c Do the procedure A74 DI Bus and Analog Power and Digital Power Cables that precedes this procedure to remove those interconnect cables d Do the procedure A23 SerPar Board and if option 05 is installed do the procedure A29 Video Trigger Board 2 Orient the oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the work surface and its rear is facing you 3 Disconnect the fan from processor display board Unplug the fan s power cable from J20 4 Remove the processor display board Use Figure 6 15 as a guide while doing the following substeps a Unplug the interconnect cable from the GPIB connector on the rear cover at J35 of the processor display board Disconnect the monitor cable at J5 Unplug J62 video signal connector J51 RS 232 connector and J38 floppy driver connector b Grasp the board by its right and left sides and pull it towards the rear of the oscilloscope This will disconnect the processor display board from the eight boar
162. erence receiver limits cont Standard Frequency MHz Lower Limit dB Nominal dB Upper Limit dB Measured A dB FC133 Fibre Channel Data Rate 132 8125 Mb s 0 00 0 5 0 0 0 5 132 81 7 03 5 7 4 37 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 101 Performance Tests Table 4 12 Bessel Thompson frequency response and reference receiver limits cont Standard Frequency MHz Lower Limit dB Nominal dB Upper Limit dB Measured A dB FC531 Fibre Channel Data Rate 531 25 Mb s 0 5 4 37 FC1063 Fibre Channel Controlled to 1 5X Data Rate Data Rate 1062 5 Mb s 0 5 0 4 1115 63 71 9 6 4 4 9 1275 0 10 5 8 5 6 5 1434 37 13 4 10 9 8 4 1593 75 16 4 13 4 10 4 4 102 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual EnE w Adjustment Procedures Description Purpose Adjustment Interval This section contains information needed to adjust the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscopes The Adjustment Procedures are divided into six subsections m General information about adjusting the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscopes m A list of equipment required to perform the adjustments m The written procedures for installing and using both the TDS 600B Adjustment Software and the TDS 700D Adjustment Software
163. ernal adjustment constants of the oscilloscope to be written Two small holes in the chassis allow service personnel to insert a tool and push a switch to enable or disable the writing of new adjustment constants to nonvolatile RAM The procedure that follows will tell you how and when to enable and disable the writing of adjustment constants Be sure to disable the switch when you have finished adjusting the oscilloscope The following computer and peripherals are required to adjust this oscilloscope An IBM compatible computer equipped as follows m Eight MHz clock speed or faster m DOS 3 2 or higher m 640K Resident RAM with 580 K Available RAM m A hard drive m A high density floppy drive 3 5 inch 1 44 M A GPIB board National Instruments GPIB PCII GPIB PCIIA or A PC GPIB Package that includes the PCII IIA is available Tektronix part number S3FG210 m Suitable keyboard and monitor Installation of a math coprocessor in your system is strongly recommended to decrease the time required to adjust the oscilloscope The equipment list starting on page 5 5 lists all test equipment required to adjust this oscilloscope The following topics cover what is required of you when adjusting the oscillo scope and what is done by the software Also the performance of individual adjustments is discussed When using the adjustment software you will not be required to manually adjust any ci
164. es fail you must do a complete adjustment Adjustment Dependencies Some adjustments depend on successful prior completion of other adjustments For example all the tests associated with the Voltage Reference Adjustment class must be passed before any other adjustments can be successfully completed Table 5 3 lists the adjustments and their dependencies Table 5 3 Adjustments and Dependencies Class of Adjustment Voltage Reference Adjustment Frequency Response Adjustment Pulse Trigger Adjustment Prior Completion Requirements None Voltage Reference SPC and all tests Voltage Reference SPC and all tests P6139A Probe Adjustment Display Adjustment 5 4 Voltage Reference and Frequency Response SPC and all tests None TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Adjustment Procedures Equipment Required Table 5 4 lists the test equipment required to adjust the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscopes Table 5 4 Test Equipment Fixtures and Supplies Item Number and Description Adapter BNC F emale to 1 BNC Female Adapter Probe Tip to BNC 50 Q termination Adapter BNC female to Clip Leads Adjustment Tool Attenuator 10X Two required Minimum Requirements Tektronix part number 013 0028 00 Tektronix part number 013 0227 00 BNC female to Clip Leads Less than 1 8 inch diameter and over 2 inches long Ratio 10X impedance 50 O connectors female BNC inp
165. esired finish checking the remaining vertical scale settings for the channel under test by repeating substeps d through g for each of the remaining scale settings listed in Table 4 4 for the channel under test m When doing substep e skip the subparts that turn on the CHx Pk Pk measurement until you check a new channel m Install remove attenuators between the generator leveling head and the channel input as needed to obtain the six division reference signals listed in the table i Test all channels Repeat substeps a through g for all four channels 3 Disconnect the hookup Disconnect the test hook up from the input connector of the channel last tested Check Delay Between Equipment One sine wave generator Item 14 Channels One precision 50 Q coaxial cable Item 5 One 50 Q terminator Item 4 One dual input coupler Item 8 Prerequisites See page 4 15 See Input Channels vs Model on page 4 2 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 41 Performance Tests 4 42 STOP DO NOT use the vertical position knob to reposition any channel while doing this check To do so invalidates the test 1 Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls a Initialize the front panel Press save recall SETUP m Press the main menu button Recall Factory Setup Press the side menu button OK Confirm Factory Init b Modify the initialized front panel control settings m Do not adjust the ve
166. ete removal Store as directed in the previous WARNING message TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 49 Removal and Installation Procedures Figure 6 22 Display assembly removal 5 Remove the display supply board Use Figure 6 23 as a guide a Remove the six screws that mount the display driver board to the main chassis b Grasp the display driver board Work from the front and top to tilt the board so its right edge is up and its left side is down and lift it out of the top of the oscilloscope s main chassis 6 50 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures Move circuit board forward to clear g main chassis Figure 6 23 Display driver board removal 6 Reinstallation a Do in reverse order substeps 5a 5b reversing each step to reinstall Display Driver board b Do in reverse order substeps 4a 4e reversing each step to reinstall the display tube if removed See step 3 to reinstall the supply fuse if it was removed d See the following procedures in order to complete reassembly of the oscilloscope m Cover and Board Brackets top cover only on page 6 38 m 11 Processor Display Board page 6 35 m If option 05 is installed A29 Video Trigger Board page 6 32 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 51 Removal and Installation Procedures 6 52 Front Subpanel 1
167. etting Slew Rate 600 ps TDS 700D 8 5 ns 5 of Delta Time Setting 1 22 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Warranted Characteristics Table 1 12 Warranted characteristics Triggering system Cont Description Accuracy Time for Pulse Glitch or Pulse Width Triggering Time range 1nsto500ns 20 of setting 0 5 ns 500 ns 015 100 ns 0 01 of Setting Field selection Odd Even or All 0 6 division to 4 divisions Accuracy Input Signal Sync Amplitude for Stable Triggering NTSC and PAL modes Option 05 Video Trigger Jitter Option 05 Video Trigger 60 on NTSC or PAL signal 1 The minimum sensitivity for obtaining a stable trigger A stable trigger results in a uniform regular display triggered on the selected slope The trigger point must not switch between opposite slopes on the waveform and the display must not roll across the screen on successive acquisitions The TRIG D LED stays constantly lighted when the SEC DIV setting is 2 ms or faster but may flash when the SEC DIV setting is 10 ms or slower ForSlew Rate Triggering this is the minimum transition time defined to be the time the user s signal spends between the two trigger threshold settings Field selection Numeric 1 division to 4 divisions NTSC mode Table 1 13 Warranted characteristics Output ports probe compensator and power requirements Name Description Log
168. fault settings m Set the vertical SCALE to 200 mV m Set the horizontal SCALE for the M main time base to 200 us Notice the waveform on the display now shows two cycles instead of five m Press SET LEVEL TO 50 m Press CLEAR MENU to remove the menus from the screen e Save the settings Press SETUP Press the main menu button Save Current Setup then press the side menu button To File TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 13 Brief Procedures 4 14 m Turn the general purpose knob to select the file to save Choose hard disk drive or Zip if an external Zip drive is connected With this choice you will save a file starting with TEK then containing 5 numbers and a SET extension For example the first time you run this on a blank formatted disk or on the Example Programs Disk the oscilloscope will assign the name TEK00000 SET to your file If you ran the procedure again the oscilloscope would increment the name and call the file TEK00001 SET NOTE If testing an external Zip drive it must first be connected to the oscillo scope then be powered on simultaneously with the oscilloscope or immediately after the oscilloscope is powered on This ensures proper communications are set up between the oscilloscope and the Zip drive f Totest the optional hard disk drive or external Zip drive choose either the hard disk drive hd0 or the external Zip drive Zip Then use the general pur
169. gative Slope 9 8853 V 10 1147 V CH1 Sensitivity full bandwidth Main Psal TC Passa CHI Sensitivity ful bandwidth Delayed ws Cd aa Output Signal Checks MAIN TRIGGER OUTPUT 1 MO High Low Low 0 7 V MAIN TRIGGER OUTPUT 50 O High Low Low 0 25 V DELAYED TRIGGER OUTPUT 50 Q High Low Low 0 25 V DELAYED TRIGGER OUTPUT 1MQ High Low Low 0 7 V 4 24 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests TDS 500D 700D Test Record cont Instrument Serial Number Certificate Number Temperature RH 96 Date of Calibration Technician TDS 500D 700D Performance Test CH 3orAX 1 SIGNAL OUTPUT 1 MO CH 3 or AX 1 SIGNAL OUTPUT 50 Probe Compensator Output Signal Frequency CH1 Freq Voltage difference Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum Were LLL Peek zm 1 050 kHz TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 25 Performance Tests TDS 794D Test Record Photocopy this and the next two pages and use them to record the performance test results for your TDS 794D TDS 794D Test Record Instrument Serial Number Certificate Number Temperature RH Date of Calibration Technician TDS 794D Performance Test Minimum e Incoming Outgoing Maximum Offset Accuracy CH1 Offset 10 mV 2 5 mV 101 mV 25 1 mV CH2 Offset 10 mV 2 5 mV 101 mV 25 1 mV CH3 Offset 10
170. ges to STOP the test is complete See Figure 4 28 Single Seq 125MS s Stop After rcc na Stop shows test complete Lo ZEE gt 1 0 button only Single Acquisition Sequence Limit Test Condition Met 2852mv 200ns VidChi i 7 COICOICOICOICO Refl 282 200 Mode Stop After Limit Test Limit Test Create P limit Test Envelope Setup Sources plate Figure 4 28 Jitter test when completed TDS 684B shown w Press the main menu Limit Test Setup x Toggle the side menu Ring Bell if Condition Met to OFF y Toggle the side menu Limit Test to OFF 4 Check Triggered Signal Range Set up oscilloscope for Triggered Signal Test a Press MORE 4 74 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests Press WAVEFORM OFF Press HORIZONTAL MENU Use the keypad to set horizontal scale div to 50 us press 50 SHIFT u then ENTER Press SHIFT then press ACQUIRE MENU Press the main menu Stop After Press the side menu RUN STOP button only Press the main menu Mode Press the side menu Sample Press RUN STOP Press VERTICAL MENU Use the keypad to set fine scale to 300 mV press 300 SHIFT m then ENTER CONFIRM that the TRIG D LED stays lighted and that the waveform on screen is stable Also CONFIRM t
171. gure 4 16 Initial test hookup 1 Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls a Hook up the test signal source m Set the output of the DC calibration generator to 0 volts m Connect the output of the DC calibration generator through a dual banana connector followed by a 50 2 precision coaxial cable to one side of a BNC T connector m Connect the Sense output of the generator through a second dual banana connector followed by a 50 Q precision coaxial cable to other side of the BNC T connector Now connect the BNC T connector to CH 1 b Initialize the oscilloscope m Press save recall Setup Press the main menu button Recall Factory Setup Press the side menu button OK Confirm Factory Init 2 Confirm Main trigger system is within limits for Trigger level Threshold accuracy a Display the test signal TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 53 Performance Tests 4 54 Set the vertical SCALE to 200 mV Press VERTICAL MENU then press the main menu button Position Set vertical position to 3 divisions press 3 then ENTER on the keypad The baseline level will move down three divisions See Figure 4 17 on page 4 55 Press the main menu button Offset Set vertical offset to 10 volts 5 volts for the TDS 794D with the keypad The baseline level will move off screen Set the standard output of the DC calibration generator equal to the offset The DC test level wil
172. h e until all four input channels are verified 3 Remove the test hookup Disconnect the probe from the channel input and the probe compensation terminals Verify the Time Base Equipment required Prerequisites One probe such as the P 6243 P6245 P6139A or P6339A None 1 Install the test hookup and preset the oscilloscope controls a Hook up the signal source Install the probe on CH 1 Connect the probe tip to PROBE COMPENSATION SIGNAL on the front panel connect the probe ground to PROBE COMPENSATION GND See Figure 4 3 on page 4 8 Initialize the oscilloscope Press save recall SETUP m Press the main menu button Recall Factory Setup then press the side menu button OK Confirm Factory Init Modify default settings m Set the vertical SCALE to 200 mV m Set the horizontal SCALE to 200 us m Press SET LEVEL TO 50 W Press CLEAR MENU to remove the menus from the screen 2 Verify that the time base operates Confirm the following statements a One period of the square wave probe compensation signal is about five horizontal divisions on screen for the 200 us horizontal scale setting set in step 1c Rotating the horizontal SCALE knob clockwise expands the waveform on screen more horizontal divisions per waveform period counter clockwise rotation contracts it and returning the horizontal scale to 200 us returns the period to about five divisions TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual
173. hat the waveform on the screen has one positive pulse and a number of negative pulses See Figure 4 29 Tek Run 1 00MS s Sample Fine Scale 300mV Positive pulse Chi j Fine Scale M Fine Scale fdiv Negative pulses fi 3o mv VidChi i 7 Coupling Bandwidth MESSIS Position Offset Cal Probe DC 250 MHz Map 0 div ov initialized ICOICOICOICOICOICOICO Figure 4 29 Triggered signal range test 300 mV TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 75 Performance Tests n Use the keypad to set the fine scale to 75 mV press 75 SHIFT m then ENTER o CONFIRM that the TRIG D LED stays lighted and that the waveform on screen is stable That is it does not move horizontally or vertically Also CONFIRM that the waveform on the screen has one positive pulse and a number of negative pulses See Figure 4 30 Tek Run 1 00MS s Sample Fine Scale 75 0mv Positive pulse Chi j Fine Scale 75 0mV 50 vid Chi T Bandwidth Position Offset Cal Probe 250 MHz 0 div initialized Figure 4 30 Triggered signal range test 75 mV p Disconnect all test equipment TSG121 from the oscilloscope 5 Check 60 Hz Rej
174. he A17 Main LV Power Supply module 6 64 Table 7 1 Options si eere ek Rx m bReSeS S ene C e teers 7 1 Table 7 2 Standard accessories 7 4 Table 7 3 Optional accessories 7 5 Table 7 4 Recommended Probe Cross Reference 7 6 Table 7 5 Accessory software 7 9 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual ix Table of Contents X TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual fcc if General Safety Summary Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it To avoid potential hazards use this product only as specified Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures To Avoid Fire or Use Proper Power Cord Use only the power cord specified for this product and Personal Injury certified for the country of use Ground the Product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded Observe All Terminal Ratings To avoid fire or shock hazard observe all ratings and markings on the product Consult the product manual for further ratings information befor
175. he Probe High Frequency Response Adjust the Probe High Do not perform this procedure until you have first completed the procedures Frequency Response Compensate the Probe and Measure Probe Bandwidth on pages 5 10 and 5 13 respectively Do not perform this procedure if you have successfully completed Measure Probe Bandwidth Probe adjustment is complete Equipment One calibration generator Item 11 required One 50 precision cable Item 9 One tunnel diode pulser Item 19 One BNC female to female adapter Item 1 One BNC to probe adapter Item 2 One 10X attenuator Item 5 One P6139A 10X probe Item 18 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 5 15 Adjustment Procedures 1 Install the test hookup and preset the oscilloscope controls a Access Inner Probe Tip and Adjustment Ports m The probe tip should be exposed from the procedure Measure Probe Bandwidth If not follow the instructions in Figure 5 5 to expose the probe tip m Follow the instructions in Figure 5 7 to remove the probe body covers Use a small standard screwdriver to pry between the cover and metal cord connector to pop off cover Repeat for lower cover Figure 5 7 Exposing the probe body b Hook up test signal source m Connect the high amplitude output of a calibration generator through a 50 Q precision cable to the input of a tunnel diode pulser See Figure 5 8 m Connect the output of the tunnel diod
176. he trim ring Also do not touch the contacts on the flex circuit exposed when you remove the trim ring 5 Remove the attenuator panel Gently pry using your fingers the snap off snap on attenuator panel away from the front subpanel to remove it When reinstalling use your hands to press it back on 6 Reinstallation Do in reverse steps 3 5 to reinstall the attenuator panel menu buttons trim ring and the front cover following the reinstallation instruc tions found in each step A12 Front Panel NOTE This procedure includes removal and reinstallation instructions for the Assembly front panel and front panel buttons Unless either of those modules are being serviced do not do step 4 Further disassembly of front panel assembly 1 Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed a Have handy a screwdriver with a size T 15 Torx tip Items 1 and 2 b Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram External modules Figure 6 1 c Do the procedure Front Cover Trim Ring Menu Buttons and Attenuator Panel steps 1 5 immediately preceding this procedure 2 Orient the oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the work surface and its front is facing you 3 Remove the front panel assembly a Liftthe front panel assembly out of the front subpanel until you can reach the interconnect cable connecting it to the processor display board b Disconnect that cable at J2 of the proce
177. heated Wait 5 minutes and power on the oscilloscope Are the front panel lights on the O Are the front panel N STBY button Is fuse blown lights on Replace fuse Does fuse blow again Does the oscilloscope work No Yes Turn off the principal power switch Disconnect the line cord from its power Source Remove the oscilloscope rear cover and cabinet using the Rear Cover and Cabinet removal procedure Connect the oscilloscope to the correct power source Tum on the principal power switch Check the power supply voltages on J 26 and J27 on the A11 DRAM Processor Display module see Table 6 5 and Figure 6 36 If necessary temporarily short pins 3 and 5 of J 26 to toggle the On Standby Control circuit Are Yes the voltages ok Turn off the principal power switch Remove the two power cables from the right side of the oscilloscope Turn on the principal power switch Without a power supply load check the power supply voltages on the A17 Main LV Power Supply module see Table 6 6 and Figure 6 36 If necessary temporarily short pins 3 and 5 of J 26 to toggle the On Standby Control circuit Are the voltages ok Turn off the power switch Disconnect the line cord from its power source Replace the Low Voltage Power Supply Yes Does it power on normally and pass all the
178. hecked under Warranted Characteristics in Specifica tions Refer to Table 4 1 on page 4 16 for test equipment specifications Check Offset Accuracy Equipment Zero Setting required None Prerequisites The oscilloscope must meet the prerequisites listed on page 4 15 See Input Channels vs Model on page 4 2 1 Preset the instrument controls a Initialize the oscilloscope Press save recall SETUP Press the main menu button Recall Factory Setup Press the side menu button OK Confirm Factory Init Press CLEAR MENU to remove the menus from the screen b Modify the default settings Press SHIFT then press ACQUIRE MENU On the TDS 600B press the main menu button Mode then press the side menu button Average 16 On the TDS 500D and 700D press the main menu button Mode then press the side menu button Hi Res Press CURSOR Press the main menu button Function then press the side menu button H Bars Press CLEAR MENU Be sure to disconnect any input signals from all four channels 2 Confirm input channels are within limits for offset accuracy at zero offset Do the following substeps test CH 1 first skipping substep a since CH 1 is already set up to be checked from step 1 a Select an unchecked channel Press WAVEFORM OFF to remove the channel just confirmed from the display Then press the front panel button that corresponds to the channel you are to confirm TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS
179. hese procedures do their steps in reverse order These procedures are found under Procedures for Outer Chassis Modules which start on page 6 28 m Cover and Board Brackets page 6 38 m Hard Disk Drive with option 2M page 6 37 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 55 Removal and Installation Procedures 6 56 m 11 Processor Display Board page 6 35 m A23 SerPar Board page 6 30 m 29 Video Trigger Board with option 05 page 6 32 m A14 DI Bus and Analog Power and Digital Power Cables page 6 28 m Fan page 6 28 m Floppy Disk Drive page 6 43 m 10 Acquisition Board page 6 40 Reinstall external modules Do in the order listed in the following procedures When doing these procedures do the steps in reverse order These procedures are found under Procedures for External Modules which starts on page 6 16 m Front Subpanel page 6 52 m Display Frame Assembly page 6 48 m A12 Front Panel Assembly page 6 23 m Front Cover Trim Ring Menu Buttons and Attenuator Panel page 6 22 m Rear Cover and Cabinet page 6 18 m Line Fuse and Line Cord page 6 17 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Troubleshooting Diagnostics This subsection contains information and procedures designed to help you isolate faulty modules in the oscilloscope If a module needs to be replaced follow the Removal and Installation Procedures located in this section The osc
180. ht most waveform See Figure 4 11 on page 4 44 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 43 Performance Tests W Press CURSOR m Press the main menu button Function then press the side menu button V Bars Press CLEAR MENU m Align one V bar cursor to the time reference point of the left most waveform edge and the other cursor to the time reference point of the right most waveform edge by rotating the General Purpose knob Press SELECT to switch between the two cursors See Figure 4 11 on page 4 44 Read the measurement results at the A cursor readout not the readout on screen Tek Run 5 00GS 5 Average i BENE gt A 50ps Cursor i aliara Function Read results 4 Display the waveforms 1 p mi lehi Toomi 7 Function seconds 2 3 Locate the time reference Align each cursor to the time points for these waveforms reference points Figure 4 11 Measurement of channel delay TDS 684B shown g Check against limits CHECK that the cursor readout on screen is lt 100 ps for the TDS 600B or lt 50 ps for the TDS 500D 700D h If the channel skew is within the limits enter time on the test record and proceed to step 3 Otherwise proceed with steps i through p 4 44 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests p Use the c
181. ic Levels Main and Delayed Trigger Characteristic Limits Outputs Vout HI 22 5 V open circuit 21 0 V into a 50 Q load to ground Vout LO 0 7 V into a load of lt 4 mA 0 25 V into a 50 load to ground Output Voltage and Frequency Characteristic Limits Probe Compensator Output Voltage 0 5 V base top 1 into a 250 load Frequency 1 kHz 5 Output Voltage Signal Out CH 31 For TDS 600B 20 mV division 20 into a 1 MQ load 10 mV division 20 into a 50 Q load ForTDS 500D 700D 22 mV division 20 into a 1 MQ load 11 mV division 20 into a 50 Q load Source Voltage 100 to 240 VACg ms continuous range CAT II Source Frequency 45 Hz to 440 Hz Power Consumption 350 W 450 VA 1 CH3 signal out is present at the rear panel if CH 3 AUX 1 on the TDS 620B or 680B is selected as the trigger source for the main and or delayed trigger systems It is not available when a channel other than CH3 AUX 1 on the TDS 620B or 680B is the source for the Video Trigger when Option 05 is installed TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 1 23 Warranted Characteristics Table 1 14 Warranted characteristics Environmental Name Atmos pherics Description Temperature no disk in floppy drive TDS 600B Operating M C to 45 C Floppy disk drive Operating 10 C to 445 C Nonoperating 22 C to 60 C TDS 5000 7000 Operating 40 C to 50 C Floppy disk drive Operating 10 C to 50 C Nonoperating 22
182. ig ure 6 22 while doing the following substeps b Unplug the display tube connector from the back of the display tube and the display tube yoke connector from the display circuit board J170 J305 and J570 Loosen the screw on the video board that holds the CRT sockets Then pull back on the video board slightly This separates the board from the socket c Remove the two screws that secure the band circling the front of display tube to the front subpanel Carefully guide display tube forward to partially remove it from the front subpanel and to access the anode lead connected to the display tube anode in the following substep you must discharge it ground a flat bladed screwdriver Item 5 with an insulated handle to the chassis through a suitable grounding strap Next probe under the insulating cap of the anode lead and touch the lead s metal conductor to discharge Repeat After unplugging the anode in substep d touch its metal conductor to the chassis for a few minutes to further ensure discharge WARNING High voltage is present on the anode lead Before unplugging the d Discharge the anode lead as described in the immediately proceeding WARNING unplug it from the display tube and discharge that lead again see WARNING e Besure you have read the WARNING on display tube handling and storage found at the start of this display tube removal procedure Then pull the display tube out through the front subpanel to compl
183. iggering m Press the side menu button Upper Limit then use the general purpose knob to slowly decrease the Upper Limit readout until triggering is lost m CHECK that the Upper Limit readout after the oscilloscope loses triggering is within 3 5 ns to 6 5 ns inclusive W Enter time on test record Tek Run 5 00GS s Sample width Lower Limit 2 0ns e Pulse width Trig when I within Limits Set upper and lower Out of Limits limits that T me ensure er Limi triggering Then change Lower Limit limits until triggering Stops 100 E M 10 0ns width Chi Source Polarity UR Class lt Width chi Positive Within Figure 4 15 Measurement of time accuracy for pulse and glitch triggering 3 Confirm the trigger system is within time accuracy limits for pulse glitch or pulse width triggering horizontal scale 1 us a Set upper and lower limits that ensure triggering at 250 kHz TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 51 Performance Tests Press the side menu button Upper Limit Use the keyboard to set the upper limit to 4 us Press the side menu button Lower Limit Use the keypad to set the lower limit to 500 ns b Display the test signal Set the horizontal SCALE to 5 us Set the output of the sine wave generator for a
184. ignal Path Compensation SPC This internal routine is not an adjustment It is a temperature compensation routine that compensates for the current operating temperature to optimize oscilloscope performance Table 5 1 Calibration Tests Class of Adjustment Voltage Reference Frequency Response Pulse Trigger Partial Adjustment The adjustment software will allow you to make individual adjustments However usually all adjustments are made unless you are adjusting circuits in the course of troubleshooting the oscilloscope Read the information under Complete Adjustment Adjustment After Repair and Adjustment Dependencies before doing an individual adjustment TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 5 3 Adjustment Procedures Adjustment After Repair After the removal and replacement of a module due to electrical failure you must either do a complete adjustment or no adjustment at all depending on the module replaced See Table 5 2 Table 5 2 Adjustments Required for Module Replaced Module Replaced Acquisition Board Front Panel Assembly Low Voltage Power Supply Adjustment Required Complete Adjustment None Required Complete Adjustment Processor Board None Required Display Assembly 1 Display Adjustment Only Optionally you may first do the complete performance verification all procedures in Chapter 4 If all procedures are passed you can skip the complete adjustment if any procedur
185. ignals having rise and fall times 0 3 div x Volts div Setting Offset gt 20ns Accuracy Auxiliary Not calibrated or specified Input Auxiliary Trigger The input resistance is 21 5 kO the maximum safe input voltage is 20 V DC peak AC Trigger Position Error Acquisition mode Trigger position error Edge Triggering Sample Average 1 Waveform Interval 1 ns Envelope 2 Waveform Intervals 1 ns Holdoff Variable Main Trigger For all Time Division ranges the minimum holdoff is 250 ns and the maximum holdoff is 12 seconds The minimum resolution is 8 ns for settings lt 1 2 ps 1 30 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Typical Characteristics Table 1 17 Typical characteristics Triggering system cont Name Description Lowest F requency for Successful Operation 30 Hz of Set Level to 50 Function Sensitivity Edge Trigger Not DC Coupled Typical signal level for stable Trigger source triggering AC Same as the DC coupled limits for frequen Sensitivities Logic Trigger and Events Delay DC Coupled4 Sensitivities Pulse Type Runt Trigger Sensitivities Pulse Type Trigger Width and Glitch Width Minimum Pulse and Rearm for Logic Triggering or Events Delay Width Minimum Pulse and Rearm for Pulse Triggering The minimum pulse widths and rearm widths and transition times required for Pulse Type triggering Noise Reject High Frequency Reject Low Freq
186. illoscope has two levels of internal diagnostics that focus on verifying adjusting and if need be isolating faulty modules Both levels of internal diagnostics report any bad modules and or interfaces If a bad module and or interface is found use the troubleshooting procedures in this section to determine which module needs to be replaced The two levels of diagnostics are the short confidence set and the extended set that tests the oscilloscope circuitry in depth and takes more time At power on the oscilloscope automatically executes the short set The extended set is optional and is executed by using the following procedure Prerequisites Power on the oscilloscope and allow a 20 minute warm up before doing this procedure 1 Display the System diagnostics menu a Press SHIFT then press UTILITY b Repeatedly press the main menu button System until Diag Err is highlighted in the pop up menu 2 Run the System Diagnostics Press the main menu button Execute then press the side menu button OK Confirm Run Test 3 Wait The internal diagnostics do an exhaustive verification of proper oscilloscope function This verification will take about two minutes When finished the oscilloscope will display a report of any bad modules and or interfaces TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 57 Troubleshooting Firmware Updates Oscilloscope firmware updates are easy to do Simply install the firmware disks on your PC an
187. ine wave crosses the center horizontal graticule line at a point within either 2 0 divisions for the TDS 600B or 2 5 divisions for the TDS 500D 700D of center graticule See Figure 4 13 W Enter number of divisions on the test record TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 47 Performance Tests Tek Run aan Sampie pene Time 10 000016ms Time Base ION Main Only SI Intensified Align the trigger T to the 1 center graticule line Set 2 horizontal mode Delayed Only Delayed Runs 4 70 000016 5 Delayed M ooms Chi f 474mV Triggerable 500ns Runs Afto see Delayed i Trig Menu frg ger ja Zord oriz EE Position ngth cale Hor 2 div 4 ISK xn 200 4 3 Check long term sample Set horizontal scale rates and delay time and delayed time accuracies against limits Figure 4 13 Measurement of accuracy Long term and delay time 3 Disconnect the hookup Disconnect the cable from the generator output at the input connector of CH 1 4 48 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests Trigger System Checks These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the Main and Delayed trigger systems and are listed as checked in Specifications Check Accuracy Time for Equipment Pulse Glitch or req
188. ion generator Item 9 Equipment required Two precision 50 Q coaxial cables Item 5 Prerequisites The oscilloscope must meet the prerequisites listed on page 4 15 See Input Channels vs Model on page 4 2 1 Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls a Hook up the test signal source m Set the output of a DC calibration generator to 0 volts m Connect the output of a DC calibration generator through a dual banana connector followed by a 50 Q precision coaxial cable to one side of a BNC T connector See Figure 4 5 m Connect the Sense output of the generator through a second dual banana connector followed by a 50 Q precision coaxial cable to the other side of the BNC T connector Now connect the BNC T connector to CH 1 See Figure 4 5 Output Sense Oscilloscope DC Calibrator Dual banana to BNC adapters BNCT connector 50 coaxial cables Figure 4 5 Initial test hookup 4 32 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests b Initialize the oscilloscope Press save recall SETUP Press the main menu button Recall Factory Setup Press the side menu button OK Confirm Factory Init c Modify the default settings m Press SHIFT then press ACQUIRE MENU Press the main menu button Mode then press the side menu button Average 16 2 Confirm input channels are within limits for DC accuracy
189. is modules TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 14 Removal and Installation Procedures Access Procedure Begin with this procedure when you have identified a module to be removed for service and have read General Instructions found earlier in this section 1 Locate module to be removed a Find the module to be removed in the module locator diagrams Figures 6 1 through 6 3 Once the module is found note from the title of the figure whether the module is an external outer chassis mounted or inner chassis mounted part If the module is externally mounted no internal access is required remove the module Find and do the procedure whose title matches the name of the module to be removed under Procedures for External Modules page 6 16 If the module is an outer or inner chassis module access the inside of the instrument a First do the procedure Line Fuse and Line Cord then do the procedure Rear Cover and Cabinet Both are found under Procedures for External Modules immediately following this procedure After completing those procedures return to this procedure and continue with step 4 If the module is an outer chassis module remove it a If removing the attenuator or display frame assembly first do the procedure Front Cover Trim Ring Menu Buttons and Attenuator Panel found under Procedures for External Modules page 6 16 Find and do the procedure whose title matches the
190. is now correctly set for the new frequency Equipment Sine wave generator Item 14 required Level meter and power sensor Item 15 Two male N to female BNC adapters Item 17 Two precision coaxial cables Item 5 Prerequisites See page 4 15 1 Install the test hookup Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4 42 start with the sine wave generator connected to the oscilloscope TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 89 Performance Tests Sine Wave Oscilloscope G t enerator PES p i i Q OOO LLL Output Level Meter Connect the sine wave generator to the oscilloscope and the power sensor as directed in the text Power sensor i Input ee H Figure 4 42 Equipment setup for maximum amplitude 2 Setthe Generator m Set the sine wave generator to a reference frequency of 10 MHz m Adjust the sine wave generator amplitude to the required number of divisions as measured by the oscilloscope 3 Record the reference level m Disconnect the sine wave generator from the oscilloscope m Connect the sine wave generator to the power sensor m Note the level meter reading 4 Setthe generator to the new frequency and reference level m Change the sine wave generator to the desired new frequency Input the correction factor and or the new frequency into the level meter Adjust the sine wave generator amplitude until the leve
191. ists key features Table 1 1 Key features of the TDS 500D 600B and 700D oscilloscopes TDS 600B TDS 500D amp TDS 700D TDS 684B 5 GS s on ea of 4 ch Feature Digitizing rate maximum Analog bandwidth No of Channels Record lengths maximum Acquisition modes Trigger modes Display TDS 580D TDS 784D TDS 680B 5 GS s on ea of 2 ch TDS 794D 4 GS s TDS 644B 2 5 GS s on ea of 4 ch TDS 540D 754D 2 GS s TDS 620B 2 5 GS s on ea of 2ch TDS 520D 724D 1 GS s TDS 794D 2 GHz TDS 580D TDS 680B 684B and 784D 1 GHz TDS 520D 540D 620B 644B 724D and 754D 500 MHz TDS 644B amp 684B 4 TDS 540D 580D TDS 620B amp 680B 2 21 TDS 754D 784D amp 794D 4 TDS 520D amp 724D 2 21 50 000 samples 500 000 with option 1M 8 000 000 with option 2M Sample envelope average high resolution and peak detect 15 000 samples Sample envelope peak detect and average Modes include Edge logic and pulse Video trigger with option 05 modes include NTSC SECAM PAL HDTV and FlexF ormat Not available on TDS 794D Communications Trigger with option 2C available on TDS 500D 700D modes include AMI CMI and NRZ TDS 520D 540D 580D 620B 680B Monochrome TDS 644B 684B 724D 754D 784D 794D Color TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 1 1 Specifications User Interface Menus Indicators General Purpose Knob Table 1 1 Key features of the
192. it 6 5 ns Upper Limit 6 5 ns Pulse Glitch or P ulse Width Hor scale 1 us Lower Limit 2 1 us Upper Limit 2 1 us Main Trigger DC Coupled Positive Slope 10 137 V Main Trigger DC Coupled Negative Slope 10 137 V Delayed Trigger DC Coupled Positive Slope 10 137 V Delayed Trigger DC Coupled Negative Slope 10 137 V CH1 Sensitivity 50 MHz Main Pass Fai ae eae Pass F ai CH1 Sensitivity 1 GHz Main ff Pala CH1 Sensitivity 1 GHz Delayed fe se e co Passa Output Signal Checks MAIN TRIGGER OUTPUT 1 MO High Low Low 0 7 V MAIN TRIGGER OUTPUT 50 Q High Low Low 0 25 V DELAYED TRIGGER OUTPUT 50 Q Low 0 25 V DELAYED TRIGGER OUTPUT 1MQ Hgh225V 1l Low 0 7 V 4 20 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests TDS 600B Test Record cont Instrument Serial Number Certificate Number Temperature RH Date of Calibration Technician TDS 600B Performance Test Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum CH 3 or AX1 SIGNAL OUTPUT 1MQ PkPk gt e0mv Ts PKK S120 mV CH or AX1 SIGNAL OUTPUT 50 PkPk gt 4omv PPK lt 60 mV Probe Compensator Output Signal Frequency CH1 Freq Voltage difference 1 050 kHz TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 21 Performance Tests TDS 500D 700D Test Record Photocopy this and the next three pages and use them to record the performance test results for you
193. ite slopes on the waveform and the display must not roll across the screen on successive acquisitions The TRIG D LED stays constantly lighted when the SEC DIV setting is 2 ms or faster but may flash when the SEC DIV setting is 10 ms or slower The minimum signal levels required for stable logic or pulse triggering of an acquisition or for stable counting of a DC coupled events delay signal Also see the footnote for Sensitivity Edge Type Trigger DC Coupled in this table Stable counting of events is counting that misses no events and produces no extra phantom events The minimum signal levels required for stable runt pulse triggering of an acquisition Also see the footnote for Sensitivity Edge Type Trigger DC Coupled in this table Stable counting of events is counting that misses no events The minimum signal levels required for stable pulse width or glitch triggering of an acquisition Also see the footnote for Sensitivity Edge Type Trigger DC Coupled in this table Stable counting of events is counting that misses no events For Logic time between channels refers to the length of time a logic state derived from more than one channel must exist to be recognized For Events the time is the minimum time between a main and delayed event that will be recognized if more than one channel is used For Slew Rate Triggering this is the minimum transition time defined to be the time the user s signal spends between the two trigger
194. ition Set the Trigger Position to 2046 using the general purpose knob or keypad NOTE Press SHIFT to change the horizontal position speed The position moves faster when SHIFT is lighted m Adjust the HORIZONTAL POSITION to move the 20 trigger point onto the display see Figure 4 44 Run 100GS s ET Sample Position Frame 1 E Horizontal Position 1 Set 10 Set to 50 Set to 90 2004w 777077 E soU AE Chi 740 Position J m car n m ni same i ae E Time Base Position Length Scale past rame 20 15000 div p 15k Dlo CIC Figure 4 44 Optical impulse of Ch1 input from OA5022 Optical Attenuator 01G501 010502 fed into optical attenuator in Step 1 j Select linear interpolation m If SHIFT is lighted press SHIFT m Press DISPLAY then press the main menu button Filter Press the side menu button Linear Interpolation 2 Select the desired Mask standard and turn it on m Press MEASURE then select Masks from the Measure pop up menu TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 95 Performance Tests 4 96 NOTE xxx is the standard that you are verifying such as OCI OC3 OC12 FC1063 see Table 4 12 From the Mask Type pop up menu select the mask type xxx of your reference receiver Press the Standard Mask main menu the
195. just R569 BRIGHTNESS until the background raster lines in the 5 luminance patch see Figure 5 11 just disappear while the lines in the 10 luminance patch are just visible when both are viewed through the magnifier ss ren 10 Patch TTE 5 Patch Figure 5 11 Five and Ten Percent Luminance Patches 3 Adjust the display contrast a Display the White Field test pattern m Press the center main menu button to display the main menu m Press the main menu button Tests m Repeatedly press the side menu button more until White Field appears in the side menu Push White Field 5 22 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Adjustment Procedures Press the main menu button EXECUTE then press the side menu button Ok Confirm Run Test b Make the contrast adjustment m Locate R572 It is one of two adjustments on the left side of the instrument located just ahead of the fan It is the adjustment nearest the front of the oscilloscope m Monitor the luminance at center screen using a J17 photometer and a luminance probe m Adjust R572 CONTRAST for a reading of 50 foot lamberts if the gray display shield is installed adjust for 110 foot lamberts if the shield is missing 4 Restore the oscilloscope to normal operation a Restore the dip switch to the settings that follow Open Closed X X X X X X X X b Power off the oscilloscope See Removal and Installation Procedures in Sec
196. l appear on screen See Figure 4 17 b Measure the test signal Press SET LEVEL TO 50 Press TRIGGER MENU Read the measurement results from the readout below the label Level in the main menu not the trigger readout in the graticule area Read results Check against limits See Figure 4 17 CHECK that the Level readout in the main menu is within the ranges listed in Table 4 6 Table 4 6 Trigger level accuracy readout Instrument Minimum Maximum TDS 600B 9 863 V 10 137 V TDS 500D 700D 9 8853 V 10 1147 V TDS 794D 4 8953 V 5 1047 V W Enter voltage on test record Press the main menu button Slope then press the side menu button for negative slope See icon at left Repeat substep b m CHECK that the Level readout in the main menu is within the ranges listed in Table 4 6 W Enter voltage on test record TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests Run 100kS s Sample Edge Slope Set vertical position to 3 divs Set vertical offset to 10 volts A 2 3 Set DC calibration generator Read results to equal offset 10 V Figure 4 17 Measurement of trigger level accuracy 3 Confirm Delayed trigger system is within limits for Trigger level Threshold accuracy a Select the Delayed time base m Press HORIZONTAL MENU
197. l featured channels can be displayed vertically positioned and offset and their vertical coupling specified Some models can have their bandwidth limited 250 MHz or 20 MHZ Fine gain can also be adjusted Besides these channels up to three math waveforms and four reference wave forms are available for display A math waveform results when you specify dual waveform operations such as add on any two channels A reference waveform results when you save a waveform in a reference memory There are three horizontal display modes main only main intensified and delayed only You can select among various horizontal record length settings A feature called Fit to Screen allows you to view entire waveform records within the 10 division screen area Waveforms are compressed to fit on the screen See Table 1 2 Both the delayed only display and the intensified zone on the main intensified display may be delayed by time with respect to the main trigger Both can be set to display immediately after the delay delayed runs after main mode The delayed display can also be set to display at the first valid trigger after the delay delayed triggerable modes The delayed display or the intensified zone may also be delayed by a selected number of events In this case the events source is the delayed trigger source The delayed trigger can also be set to occur after a number of events plus an amount of time TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Se
198. l meter again reads the value noted in step 3 The signal amplitude is now correctly set for the new frequency m Disconnect the sine wave generator from the power sensor Connect the sine wave generator to the oscilloscope 4 90 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests Optical Filters Checks TDS 500D TDS 700D Only The procedure that follows verifies that the frequency response of the combined P670xB and TDS500D 700D oscilloscope system is a Fourth Order Bessel Thompson Filter which is within limits Filter Availability Nominal Filters are available with Option 2C Reference Receiver Filters are available with Options 3C and 4C Options 3C and 4C are not available without 2C and 3C and 4C are not available on the TDS 794D You can verify Option 2C is enabled on the TDS 794D by pressing MEASURE then selecting Masks from the Measure pop up menu Table 4 8 lists the available vertical scale factors for each option Tables 4 9 4 10 and 4 11 list the available filters and their specifications Table 4 8 Available Filters Nominal Filters Reference Receivers Filters Option 2C Options 3C 4C 1 uW per division 2 uW per division 5 uW per division 10 uW per division 10 uW per division 20 uW per division 20 uW per division 50 uW per division 50 uW per division 100 uW per division 200 uW per division 500 uW per division 1 mW per division Table 4 9 Reference Receiver Filt
199. l with 10 pF 3 pF DC 50 Q Coupled only on TDS 794D 50 1 with VSWR lt 1 3 1 from DC 500 MHz lt 1 5 1 from 500 MHz 1 GHz 50 Q 1 25 with VSWR lt 1 5 1 from 100 MHz 1 GHz VSWR x1 7 1 from 1 GHz 2 GHz TDS 600B 300 V CAT 400 V peak derate at 20 dB decade above 1 MHz TDS 500D 700D 300 V CAT Il 400 V peak derate at 20 dB decade above 1 MHz 5 Vnus with peaks lt 30 V 5 Vnus with peaks lt 20 V Lower Frequency Limit AC Coupled 10 Hz when AC 1 MQ Coupled lt 200 kHz when AC 50 O Coupled 1 Net Offset Offset Position x Volts Div Net Offset is the nominal voltage level at the oscilloscope input that corresponds to the center of the A D converter s dynamic range Offset Accuracy is the accuracy of this voltage level The limits given are for the ambient temperature range of 0 C to 30 C Reduce the upper bandwidth frequencies by 5 MHz for the TDS 600B by 2 5 MHz for the 500 MHz TDS 500D 700D models by 5 MHz for the 1 GHz TDS 500D 700D models and by 10 MHz for the 2 GHz TDS 500D 700D models for each C above 30 C 3 The AC Coupled Lower Frequency Limits are reduced by a factor of 10 when 10X passive probes are used TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 1 21 Warranted Characteristics Table 1 11 Warranted characteristics Time base system Name Description Accuracy Long Term Sample Rate and Delay Time TDS 600B 100 ppm over any 21 ms interval TDS 500
200. le coming from the display frame assembly at J39 of the front panel assembly c Do the procedure Floppy Disk page 6 43 to remove the floppy disk drive d Remove the three screws securing the display frame assembly to the front subpanel and remove that assembly 4 Reinstallation a Do in reverse order substeps 3b 3d reversing each step to reinstall the display frame assembly Then see the procedure Front Cover Trim Ring Menu Buttons and Attenuator Panel page 6 22 to complete reassemb ly of the oscilloscope Cabinet Modules 1 Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed Have handy a pair of needle nose pliers Item 6 Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram External modules see Figure 6 1 2 Orient the oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope so the left side is down on the work surface and its handle is facing upwards 3 Remove the handle a Insert the tips of a pair of needle nose pliers Item 6 into the hole of either handle cap Push and hold to depress the handle release b While holding the handle released pull it out of the slot in the handle cap Repeat procedure to remove the handle from the other handle cap c Reverse procedure to reinstall 4 Remove the handle caps a Insert the retaining ring pliers Item 8 into the opening created in the handle cap when you removed the handle b While using the pliers to expand the handle cap outward grasp it and snap it off
201. llowing specifications as listed in the Official J ournal of the European Communities EMC Directive 89 336 EEC EN 50081 1 Emissions EN 55022 Class B Radiated and Conducted Emissions EN 60555 2 AC Power Line Harmonic Emissions EN 50082 1 Immunity IEC 801 2 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity IEC 801 3 RF Electromagnetic Field Immunity IEC 801 4 Electrical Fast Transient Burst Immunity IEC 801 5 Power Line Surge Immunity Compliance was demonstrated to the following specification as listed in the Official J ournal of the European Communities Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC EN 61010 1 1993 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Se a Cassy Typical Characteristics This subsection contains tables that list the various typical characteristics which describe the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D oscilloscopes Typical characteristics are described in terms of typical or average performance Typical characteristics are not warranted Table 1 16 Typical characteristics Signal acquisition system Name Analog Bandwidth DC 50 Coupled with P6243 or P6245 Probe and Bandwidth selection is FULL TDS 520D 540D 724D amp 754D Description Volts Div as read out on screen 520D 540D 724D amp 754D Bandwidth 10 V div 100 V div 100 mV div 10 V div 50 mV div 99 5 mV div 20 mV div 49 8 mV div 10 mV div 19 9 m
202. mV 2 5 mV 101 mV 25 1 mV CH4 Offset 10 mV 2 5 mV 101 mV 25 1 mV DC Voltage Measurement Accuracy Averaged CH1 10 mV Vert scale setting 0 5755 V 0 5845 V 5 Div position setting 5 V offset CH1 10 mV Vert scale setting 0 5845 V 0 5755 V 5 Div position setting 5 V offset CH1 200 mV Vert scale setting 5 5345 V 5 6655 V 0 Div position setting 5 V offset CH1 200 mV Vert scale setting 5 6655 V 5 5345 V 0 Div position setting 5 V offset CH1 1 V Vert scale setting 5 289 V 5 11V 0 Div position setting 42 5 V offset CH1 1 V Vert scale setting 5 711 V 5 289 V 0 Div position setting 2 5 V offset CH2 10 mV Vert scale setting Oooo aaa eaaa 0 5845 V 5 Div position setting 5 V offset CH2 10 mV Vert scale setting 0 5845V _________ ________ 0 5755 V 5 Div position setting 5 V offset CH2 200 mV Vert scale setting 5 5345V 35 0655 V 0 Div position setting 5 V offset 4 26 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests TDS 794D Test Record cont Instrument Serial Number Temperature C R Date of Calibration TDS 794D Performance Test ertificate Number H 96 Technician Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum CH2 200 mV Vert scale setting 5 6655 V 5 5345 V 0 Div position setting 5 V offset CH2 1 V Vert scale setting 15 280 V 45 711 V 0 Div position setting 2 5
203. mance Tests Table 4 1 Test equipment cont Item number and description Minimum requirements Example Purpose 15 Meter Level and Power Frequency range 10 MHz to scope Rohde amp Schwarz URV 35 Checking Analog Bandwidth Sensor bandwidth 5 1 or2 GHz Amplitude NRVS 55 with NRV Z24 and Trigger Sensitivity ao to 2 Vig power 4 16 Splitter Power Frequency range DC to 1 GHz Rohde amp Schwarz RVZ 4 Checking Analog Bandwidth Tracking 22 096 17 Adapter four required Male N to female BNC Tektronix part number Checking Analog Bandwidth 103 0045 00 18 Adapter Female N to male BNC Tektronix part number Checking Analog Bandwidth 103 0058 00 19 Generator Video Signal Provides PAL compatible outputs Tektronix TSG 121 Used to Test Video Option 05 Equipped Instruments Only 20 Oscillator Leveled Sine 60 Hz Sine wave Tegam Tektronix SG 502 if Used to Test Video Option 05 wave Generator available 2 Equipped Instruments Only 21 Pulse Generator Tektronix CFG 280 Used to Test Video Option 05 or Tegam Tektronix PG 502 Equipped Instruments Only 22 Cable Coaxial 75 Q 36 in male to male BNC Tektronix part number Used to Test Video Option 05 two required connectors 012 1338 00 Equipped Instruments Only 23 Terminator 75 Q Impedance 75 connectors female Tektronix part number Used to Test Video Option 05 two required BNC inpu
204. mbly of the oscilloscope Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed Have handy a screwdriver with a size T 15 Torx tip Items 1 and 2 Find the modules to be removed in the locator diagram Outer Chassis Modules Figure 6 2 page 6 13 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures 2 Orient the oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope so its left side is down on the work surface and its front is facing you 3 Remove the D1 bus Grasp the D1 bus and pull it up from the oscilloscope to unplug it from its two plug in connectors J28 is the connector on the processor display board J100 is on the acquisition board Reverse these removal instructions to reinstall 4 Remove the analog power and digital power interconnect cables a Unplug the analog power cable at J26 on the display processor board at J5 on the low voltage power supply and at J700 on the acquisition board b Unplug the digital power cable at J27 on the display processor board at J6 on the low voltage power supply and at J101 on the acquisition board Analog and Digital Power Cables QO 000090 AS O Figure 6 10 A14 D1 bus and analog power and digital power cables removal 5 Reinstallation a Do in reverse order steps 3 and 4 reversing the procedure outlined in each step to reinstall the assembly b When installing the D1 bus be sure to orient it so the single connector
205. ment from the fan Observe the luminance patches using a 6X magnifier Adjust R403 BRIGHTNESS until the background raster lines in the 5 luminance patch see Figure 5 11 just disappear while the lines in the 10 luminance patch are just visible when both are viewed through the magnifier 4 Adjust the display contrast a Display the White Field test pattern 5 24 Press the center main menu button to display the main menu Press the main menu button Tests TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Adjustment Procedures m Repeatedly press the side menu button more until White Field appears in the side menu Push White Field m Press the main menu button EXECUTE then press the side menu button Ok Confirm Run Test b Make the contrast adjustment m Locate R404 It is one of the adjustments on the left side of the instrument located just ahead of the fan It is the fifth adjustment from the fan m Monitor the luminance at center screen using a J17 photometer and a luminance probe m Adjust R404 CONTRAST for a reading of 36 foot lamberts for 640 0077 XX display assemblies where XX equals 06 or above Use a reading of 40 foot lamberts for 640 0077 XX assemblies where XX equals 05 or below NOTE The adjustments for contrast and brightness interact with each other 5 Restore the oscilloscope to normal operation a Restore the dip switch to the settings that follow
206. menu button more until Frequency appears in the side menu its icon is shown at the left Press the side menu button Frequency b Check against limits CHECK that the CH 1 Freq readout is within 950 Hz to 1 050 kHz inclusive See Figure 4 23 Enter frequency on test record Press MEASURE then press the main menu button Remove Measrmnt Press the side menu Measurement 1 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 67 Performance Tests Tek Run 250kS s Average C1 Freq 1 0000kHz Oooo oj M 200Hs Chi 7 242mV 28 feb 1994 11 32 40 COCOCO CO C9 C9 cC Figure 4 23 Measurement of probe compensator frequency c Save the probe compensation signal in reference memory m Press SAVE RECALL WAVEFORM then press the main menu button Save Wfm Ch 1 Press the side menu button To Ref 1 to save the probe compensation signal in reference 1 m Disconnect the cable from CH 1 and the clips from the probe compensation terminals m Press MORE then press the main menu button Ref 1 to displayed the stored signal m Press CH 1 d Hook up the DC standard source m Set the output of a DC calibration generator to 0 volts m Connect the output of a DC calibration generator through a dual banana connector followed by a 50 precision coaxial cable to one side of a BNC T connector See Figure 4 24
207. minum alloy front panel constructed of plastic laminate circuit boards constructed of glass laminate Cabinetis aluminum and is clad in Tektronix Blue vinyl material Standard Oscilloscope 14 1 kg 31 105 with front cover 24 0 kg 53 Ibs when packaged for domestic shipment Rackmount Oscilloscopes 14 1 kg 31 105 plus weight of rackmount parts for the rackmounted Oscilloscopes Option 1R Rackmount conversion kit 2 3 kg 5 165 parts only 3 6 kg 8 Ibs parts plus package for domestic shipping Overall Dimensions Standard Oscilloscope Height 193 mm 7 6 in with the feet installed Width 445 mm 17 5 in with the handle Depth 434 mm 17 1 in with the front cover installed Rackmount Oscilloscope Height 178 mm 7 0 in Width 483 mm 19 0 in Depth 558 8 mm 22 0 in TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 1 17 Nominal Traits 1 18 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Warranted Characteristics This section lists the various warranted characteristics that describe the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D oscilloscopes Electrical and environmen tal characteristics are included Warranted characteristics are described in terms of quantifiable performance limits which are warranted NOTE In these tables those warranted characteristics that are checked in the procedure Performance Verification appear in boldface type under the column Name
208. module Accessories Missing items or parts of items Repair or replace damaged or bent pins broken or frayed missing items frayed cables and cables and damaged connectors defective modules Cleaning Procedure Exterior To clean the oscilloscope exterior do the following steps 1 Remove loose dust on the outside of the oscilloscope with a lint free cloth 2 Remove remaining dirt with a lint free cloth dampened in a general purpose detergent and water solution Do not use abrasive cleaners 3 Clean the light filter protecting the monitor screen with a lint free cloth dampened with either isopropyl alcohol or preferably a gentle general purpose detergent and water solution CAUTION To prevent getting moisture inside the oscilloscope during external cleaning use only enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applicator Inspection Interior To access the inside of the oscilloscope for inspection and cleaning refer to the Removal and Installation Procedures in this section Inspect the internal portions of the oscilloscope for damage and wear using Table 6 3 as a guide Defects found should be repaired immediately If any electrical module is replaced check Table 5 2 in Section 5 to see if it is necessary to adjust the oscilloscope CAUTION To prevent damage from electrical arcing ensure that circuit boards and components are dry before applying power to the oscilloscope TDS 500D TDS 600B
209. move those modules 2 Orient the oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the work surface and its rear is facing you 3 Remove the hard disk drive Use Figure 6 16 as a guide a Slide the retainer bracket toward the rear of the oscilloscope Lift the bracket up and away from the oscilloscope to complete the removal b Grasp the board by its right and left sides and pull it towards the rear of the oscilloscope This will disconnect the hard disk board from the board mounts securing the board above the top cover c Liftthe board up away from the oscilloscope chassis to complete the removal 4 Reinstallation a Do in reverse order steps 3a through 3c Reverse the removal instruc tions of each step to reinstall the hard disk drive b Seethe procedures A11 Processor Display Board page 6 35 if option 05 is installed A29 Video Trigger Board page 6 32 A23 SerPar Board page 6 30 A14 DI Bus and Analog Power and Digital Power Cables page 6 28 and Rear Cover and Cabinet page 6 18 to complete reassembly of the oscilloscope TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 37 Removal and Installation Procedures Hard Disk Release Lever c Figure 6 16 Hard disk removal Top Cover and Board 1 Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed Brackets a Have handy a screwdriver with a size T 15 tip Items 1 and 2 and if
210. mples sec to 2 5 GSamples sec on four channels simultaneously TDS 620B 5 Samples sec to 2 5 GSamples sec on two channels simultaneously TDS 520D and 724D 5 Samples sec to 2 GSamples sec when acquiring 1 channel to 1 GSample sec when acquiring 2 channels TDS 540D 5 Samples sec to 2 GSamples sec when acquiring 1 or 2 channels to 1 GSample sec when acquiring 3 or 4 channels TDS 540D Opt 16 5 Samples sec to 1 GSample sec when acquiring 1 to 4 channels TDS 754D 5 Samples sec to 2 GSamples sec when acquiring 1 or 2 channels to 1 GSample sec when acquiring 3 or 4 channels TDS 754D Opt 16 5 Samples sec to 1 GSample sec when acquiring 1 to 4 channels TDS 580D 784D and 794D 5 Samples sec to 4 GSamples sec when acquiring 1 channel to 2 GSamples sec when acquiring 2 channels orto 1 GSample sec when acquiring 3 or 4 channels Range Interpolated Waveform Rate23 TDS 600B 10 GSamples sec to 250 GSamples sec TDS 520D 540D 724D and 754D 1 GSample sec to 100 GSamples sec TDS 580D 784D and 794D 2 GSamples sec to 250 GSamples sec Range Seconds Division TDS 600B 0 2 ns div to 10 s div TDS 500D 724D and 754D 0 5 ns div to 10 s div TDS 580D 784D and 794D 0 2 ns div to 10 s div 1 12 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Nominal Traits Table 1 4 Nominal traits Time base system cont Name Description TDS 500D amp TDS 700D 500 1 000 2 500 5 000 15 000 and 50 000 samples In addition to the re
211. n select your reference receiver mask xxx from the side menu NOTE For the Bessel Thompson BT filter to be active the VERTICAL MENU deskew must be set to zero on all four channels Also the ACQUIRE MENU Acquisition Mode must be Sample If you did the Factory Setup specified in Step la you selected these modes If checking a reference receiver verify that RR is displayed to the right of the vertical scale factor see Figure 4 45 Press TRIGGER MENU then select Edge from the Type pop up menu 3 Turn on an FFT of the optical impulse the Impulse Response or Frequency Response of the P670xB and oscilloscope system Refer to Figure 4 46 a Press the front panel MORE button then press the main menu button Math2 This turns on a math waveform If the math waveform is not set to FFT create an FFT waveform W Press Change Math waveform definition then press the main menu button FFT W Press the side menu button Set FFT source to Chl NOTE Verify the FFT window is set to Rectangular Also verify the FFT Vert Scale is set to dBV RMS If you did the Factory Setup in Step la you selected these modes W Press the side menu button OK Create Math Waveform Press the side menu button Average then set the number of averages to 16 using the general purpose knob or keypad TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests 4 Move the beginning of the FFT data record onto the
212. name of the module to be removed under Procedures for Outer Chassis Modules on page 6 28 If the module is an inner chassis module access the inner chassis a If removing the display tube display driver board or the front subpanel first do the procedure Front Cover Trim Ring Menu Buttons and Attenuator Panel found under Procedures for External Modules Also remove the display frame assembly found under Procedures for External Modules on page 6 16 Also if removing the front subpanel do A 2 Front Panel Assembly also found under Procedures for External Modules Do in the order listed the three procedures A74 D1 Bus and Analog Power and Digital Power Cables A11 Processor Display Board and Top Cover found under Procedures for Outer Chassis Modules page 6 28 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 15 Removal and Installation Procedures 6 d Find and do the procedure whose title matches the name of the module to be removed under Procedures for Inner Chassis Modules page 6 47 Reinstall all modules removed Read the instructions found at the end of the procedure that removes the module to be serviced they will guide you in reinstalling all modules removed Procedures for External Modules Do the Access Procedure page 6 15 before doing any procedure in this collection The following procedures are found here and are listed in order presented Front Panel Knobs 1 6 16 Front Panel
213. nd TDS 700D Service Manual Mfr code 0J9P9 0KB01 0KB01 1DM20 1JJ96 0 9P9 0 R05 50356 OKBOI Mfr part number ORDER BY DESC 26C4MXPHY ORDER BY DESC 1 00MM 26 7 B BFS 33 5 X 8X 407 4230 01 337 3935 01 FD 04HF 2300 950 4827 xx 10 17 Mechanical Parts List aS 7 gm 4 Floppy disk drive Figure 10 6 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 10 18 Mechanical Parts List Replaceable Parts List Fig amp index number Serial no discontd Qty Serial no effective Tektronix part number 7 1 161 0104 05 1 2 161 0104 06 1 3 161 0104 07 1 4 161 0104 08 1 5 161 0167 00 1 006 3415 04 1 200 0678 00 1 063 2773 xx 1 071 0130 xx 1 071 0134 xx 1 071 0131 xx 1 071 0132 xx 1 071 0133 xx 1 071 0135 xx 1 020 2235 xx 1 016 1268 00 1 063 2028 00 1 Name amp description STANDARD ACCESSORIES CA ASSY P WR 3 1 0MM SQ 250V 10A 2 5 M OPTION A3 AUSTRALIAN CA ASSY PWR 3 1 0MM SQ 250V 10A 2 5 M OPTION A1 EUROPEAN CA ASSY PWR 3 1 0MM SQ 240V 10A 2 5 M OPTION A2 UNITED KINGDOM CA ASSY PWR 3 18 AWG 250 10A 98 INCH L OPTION A4 NORTH AMERICAN CA ASSY P WR 3 0 75MM SQ 250V 10A 2 5 M OPTION A5 SWITZERLAND CABLE ASSY PWER 3 18 AWG 92 L STANDARD CABLE SEE FIG 10 1 2 RTNR CA TO CA U W 0 25 OD CABLES OPTIONS Al A2 A3 A4 A5 CLAMP PWER CORD POLYMI
214. nd TDS 700D Service Manual 1 5 Specifications Acquisition Control 1 6 that you specify It can also trigger on a pulse edge that has a slew rate faster or slower than the rate you specify The timeout trigger will act when events do not occur in a defined time period The pulse trigger is also configurable for source polarity mode and holdoff Video with option 05 Video Trigger Video triggering is compatible with standard NTSC PAL SECAM and HDTV formats An additional feature called FlexFormat flexible format allows the user to define the video format on which to trigger Comm with option 2C is provided for triggering on AMI CMI or NRZ communications signals You can choose where the trigger point is located within the acquired waveform record by selecting the amount of pretrigger data displayed Presets of 10 50 and 90 of pretrigger data can be selected in the horizontal menu or the general purpose knob can be assigned to set pretrigger data to any value within the 0 to 100 limits You can specify a mode and manner to acquire and process signals that matches your measurement requirements Select the mode for interpolation linear or sin x x This can increase the apparent sample rate on the waveform when the maximum real time rate is exceeded Use sample envelope average and peak detect modes to acquire signals With the Oscilloscopes also use high resolution mode Set the acquisition to sto
215. neously These are delta measurements that is measurements based on the difference between two cursors Both H Bar and V Bar cursors can also be used to make absolute measurements For the H Bars either cursor can be selected to read out its voltage with respect to any channel s ground reference level For the V Bars the cursors measure time with respect to the trigger point event of the acquisition The cursors can also control the portion of the waveform on which automatic measurements are made For time measurements units can be either seconds or hertz for 1 time With the video trigger option installed Option 05 you can measure the video line number using the vertical cursors You can measure IRE amplitude NTSC using the horizontal cursors with or without the video trigger option installed Measure can automatically extract parameters from the signal input to the oscilloscope Any four out of the 25 parameters available can be displayed to the screen The waveform parameters are measured continuously with the results updated on screen as the oscilloscope continues to acquire waveforms TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 1 7 Specifications Digital Signal Processing Storage 1 8 05 An important component of the multiprocessor architecture of this oscilloscope is Tektronix proprietary digital signal processor the DSP This dedicated processor supports advanced analysis of your waveforms wh
216. ng 0 25 x Wi gt 100 Averages with Full Band are IOO Averages wih Full Band TDS 5000 7000 20 ps 25 ppm x Reading t iv 1000 500D 700D repetitive mode Calculated Rise Time TDS 60082 Md 620B amp 644B 680B amp 684B Volts Div setting Rise time Rise time 10 mV div 1 V div 900 ps 450 ps 5 mV div 9 95 mV div lns 600 ps 2 mV div 4 98 mV div 1 5 ns 150 ps 1 mV div 1 99 mV div 1 8 ns 900 ps 1 28 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Typical Characteristics Table 1 16 Typical characteristics Signal acquisition system cont Name Calculated Rise Time TDS 500D 700D2 Description 520D 5400 724D 5800 amp 7840 Volts Div setting amp 754D Rise time Rise time 10 mV div 1 V div 800 ps 400 ps 5 mV div 9 95 mV div 800 ps 530 ps 2 mV div 4 98 mV div 800 ps 600 ps 1 mV div 1 99 mV div 890 ps 800 ps Calculated Rise Time 794D Rise time Volts Div setting TDS 794D 10 mV div 1 V div 200 ps Effective Bits TDS 600B Input frequency Effective bits 98 MHz 245 MHz 490 MHz 990 MHz Sample rate 1 MHz 9 2 divs 6 8 bits Sample rate 1 MHz 9 2 divs 6 8 bits Sample rate 6 3 bits 6 0 bits 5 5 bits The chart on the right gives the typical effective bits for a 9 division sine wave input 50 mV div 10 ns div 5 GS s with a record length of 1000 points Effective Bits TDS 520D amp 724D The chart on
217. ng the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix with shipping charges prepaid Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix service center is located Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges duties taxes and any other charges for products returned to any other locations This warranty shall not apply to any defect failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install repair or service the product b to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment or c to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TEKTRONIX RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
218. ng you 3 Remove the A29 Video Trigger board Figure 6 13 shows the A29 Video Trigger board option 05 installed a Remove or pull loose the A27 Connector board see number 3 on Figure 6 14 b Slide back and lift up the Video Trigger circuit board see Figure 6 14 6 32 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures Coax Cable Figure 6 13 Circuit board installed 6 33 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures Coax Cable To J 1500 Figure 6 14 Circuit board removal 4 Reinstallation a Do in reverse order steps a through e Reverse the removal instructions of each step to reinstall the A29 Video Trigger Board NOTE For the TDS 600B be sure to arrange the coax cable as shown in Figures 6 13 and 6 14 Failure to do this may impair performance Also when plugging in the digital bus boards 1 and 3 in Figure 6 14 make sure that they remain plugged in on both ends 6 34 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures b See the procedures A74 D1 Bus and Analog Power and Digital Power Cables page 6 28 A23 SerPar Board page 6 30 and Rear Cover and Cabinet page 6 18 to complete reassembly of the oscilloscope Toensure the Video Trigg
219. not have a leveled sine wave generator use one of the following procedures to level the output amplitude of your sine wave generator Equipment Sine wave generator Item 14 required 3 Level meter and power sensor Item 15 Power splitter Item 16 Two male N to female BNC adapters Item 17 One precision coaxial cable Item 5 Prerequisites See page 4 15 Sine Wave Oscilloscope Generator p Level Meter ET lt Input Power splitter Output Attenuators if necessary Power sensor Figure 4 41 Sine wave generator leveling equipment setup 1 Install the test hookup Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4 41 2 Set the Generator m Set the sine wave generator to a reference frequency of 10 MHz TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests m Adjust the sine wave generator amplitude to the required number of divisions as measured by the oscilloscope 3 Record the reference level Note the reading on the level meter 4 Set the generator to the new frequency and reference level m Change the sine wave generator to the desired new frequency m Input the correction factor and or the new frequency into the level meter m Adjust the sine wave generator amplitude until the level meter again reads the value noted in step 3 The signal amplitude
220. o be used with video trigger option 05 Zoom This oscilloscope also provides an easy way to focus in on those waveform features you want to examine up close By invoking zoom you can magnify the waveform using the vertical and horizontal controls to expand or contract and position it for viewing TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 1 9 Specifications 1 10 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Nominal Traits This section contains a collection of tables that list the various nominal traits that describe the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D oscilloscopes Electrical and mechanical traits are included Nominal traits are described using simple statements of fact such as Four all identical for the trait Input Channels Number of rather than in terms of limits that are performance requirements Table 1 3 Nominal traits Signal acquisition system Name Bandwidth S elections Description 20 MHz 250 MHz and FULL No BW limiton TDS 794D Samplers Number of TDS 540D 580D 644B 684B 754D 784D and 794D Four simultaneous TDS 520D 620B 680B and 724D Two simultaneous Digitized Bits Number of 8 bits Input Channels Number of Four Input Coupling DC AC or GND TDS 794D DC or GND only Input Impedance Selections 1MQ or50 TDS 794D 50 only Ranges Offset All except TDS 794D Ranges Offset TDS 794D only Range Position Range
221. odules in their static protected containers or on a metal rail Label any package that contains static sensitive modules Discharge the static voltage from your body by wearing a grounded antistatic wrist strap while handling these modules Do service of static sensitive modules only at a static free work station Nothing capable of generating or holding a static charge should be allowed on the work station surface Handle circuit boards by the edges when possible Do not slide the modules over any surface Avoid handling modules in areas that have a floor or work surface covering capable of generating a static charge Susceptibility to ESD Table 6 1 lists the relative susceptibility of various classes of semiconductors Static voltages of 1 to 30 are common in unprotected environments 6 2 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Maintenance Table 6 1 Relative susceptibility to static discharge damage Relative susceptibility Semiconductor classes levels MOS or CMOS microcircuits or discrete circuits or linear 1 microcircuits with MOS inputs most sensitive ECL 2 Schottky signal diodes 3 Schottky TTL 4 High frequency bipolar transistors 5 JFET 6 Linear microcircuits 7 Low power Schottky TTL 8 TTL least sensitive 9 Voltage equivalent for levels voltage discharged from a 100 pF capacitor through resistance of 100 ohms 1 100 to 500 V 6 600 to 800 V 2 200 to 500 V 7 400 to 1
222. odules the removal of which require access internal to the instrument but external to the chassis m Procedures for Inner Chassis Modules on page 6 47 are procedures for removing modules the removal of which require access internal to the instrument and internal to the chassis m Disassembly for Cleaning on page 6 54 is a procedure based on the removal procedures just described that removes all modules for cleaning Instructions for cleaning are found in nspection and Cleaning which begins this section NOTE Read the cleaning procedure before disassembling the oscilloscope for cleaning 6 10 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures Equipment Required Most modules in this oscilloscope can be removed with a screwdriver handle mounted with a size T 15 Torx 9 screwdriver tip Use this tool whenever a procedure step instructs you to remove or install a screw unless a different size screwdriver is specified in that step All equipment required to remove and reinstall each module is listed in the first step of its procedure Table 6 4 Tools Required for Module Removal Item Tektronix Part No Description Number 1 Screwdriver handle Accepts Torx driver bits 003 0301 00 2 T 15 Torx tip Torx driver bit for T 15 size screw 003 0966 00 heads 3 T 20 Torx tip Torx driver bit for T 20 size screw 003 0866 00 heads 4 T 20 Torx tip Special Tool Narrow Torx driver
223. oggles operation on and off When connected to a power source and when the principal power switch is on the internal power supplies and much of the other circuitry of these oscilloscopes are energized regardless of the setting of the ON STBY switch TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 2 7 Operating Instructions Graticule and waveforms 41 Waveform reference symbols shows ground ke du Utd creel he Perce levels and waveform sources Vertical scale horizontal scale and trigger level readouts Pop up menu gt How to Use Help How to Use the Status Menu 2 8 Position of waveform record relative to General purpose the screen and display knob readout Brief status information i eere Tie IDE Level Side menu area Readouts for measurements move here when CLEAR MENU is pressed Set to TTL Set to ECL S d 1 Logic Togo 20 Chi f 400mV Pulse i Video Type Source Coupling Slope Level Fuge cht DC f 400MV VL 955 Holdott EY cococ tcpie cco Main menu display area Readouts in lower graticule area move here when CLEAR MENU is pressed Figure 2 1 Map of Display Functions Push the HELP
224. on selects a setting such as DC On screen readouts help you keep track of the settings for various functions such as vertical and horizontal scale and trigger level Some readouts use the cursors or the automatic parameter extraction feature called measure to display the results of measurements made or the status of the instrument Assign the general purpose knob to adjust a selected parameter function More quickly change parameters by toggling the SHIFT button Use the same method as for selecting a function except the final side menu selection assigns the general purpose knob to adjust some function such as the position of measure ment cursors on screen or the setting for a channel fine gain TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Specifications GUI The user interface also makes use of a GUI or Graphical User Interface to make setting functions and interpreting the display more intuitive Some menus and status are displayed using iconic representations of function settings such as those shown here for full 250 MHz and 20 MHz bandwidth Such icons allow you to more readily determine status or the available settings Signal Acquisition System Horizontal System The signal acquisition system provides up to four full featured vertical channels with calibrated vertical scale factors from 1 mV to 10 V per division depending on TDS model All channels can be acquired simultaneously Each of the ful
225. on 10 lists all modules TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 9 Removal and Installation Procedures General Instructions STOP READ THESE GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE REMOVING A MODULE First read over the Summary of Procedures that follows to understand how the procedures are grouped Then read Equipment Required for a list of the tools needed to remove and install modules in this oscilloscope If you are disassembling this oscilloscope for cleaning go to the procedure Disassembly for Cleaning on page 6 54 If you are removing a module for service begin by doing the procedure Access Procedure page 6 15 By following the instructions in that procedure you remove the module to be serviced while removing the minimum number of additional modules Summary of Procedures The procedures are described in the order in which they appear in this section In addition you can look up any procedure for removal and reinstallation of any module in the Table of Contents of this manual m The Access Procedure on page 6 15 first directs you to the procedure s if any that are required to access the module to be serviced then it directs you to the procedure to remove that module m Procedures for External Modules on page 6 16 are procedures for removing modules the removal of which do not require internal access to the oscillo scope m Procedures for Outer Chassis Modules on page 6 28 are procedures for removing m
226. on the selected slope positive or negative This display should not have its trigger point switching between opposite slopes nor should it roll across the screen At horizontal scale settings of 4 58 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests 2 ms division and faster TRIG D will remain constantly lighted It will flash for slower settings Press TRIGGER MENU then press the main menu button Slope Press SET LEVEL TO 50 Adjust the TRIGGER LEVEL knob so that the TRIG D light is on Set the level to near the middle of the range where the TRIG D light is on CHECK that the trigger is stable for the test waveform on both the positive and negative slopes Use the side menu to switch between trigger slopes use the TRIGGER LEVEL knob to stabilize the trigger if required Enter pass fail result for main trigger on the test record Leave the Main trigger system triggered on the positive slope of the waveform before continuing to the next step Tek Run 2 30GS s Average Check if stable trigger HUE tooma c7 777 Ci M zolang Chi 77 sm Source Coupling Level ode Type amp pes chi DC amv Edge Slope C1 Ampl 36mVv c Figure 4 19 Measurement of trigger sensitivity 50 MHz results shown on a TDS 684B screen c Check Delayed trigger system for stable
227. ontal Scale Main Scale 50 Pts Div Delayed Scale 50 Pts Div aans 282mV COICOICOICOICO L m s parsti 1 a BE S Time Base Position Length Scale Horte 50 500 div DIGIC OIC lO C Figure 4 27 Jitter test displayed waveform TDS 684B shown c Press SHIFT then press ACQUIRE MENU d Press the main menu Mode e Select the side menu Average It should be already set to 16 f Press the main menu Create Limit Test Template Press the side menu V Limit h Use the keypad to set V Limit to 180 mdiv press 180 SHIFT m then ENTER i Press the side menu OK Store Template j Press MORE k Press the main menu Refl l Press CHI m Press SHIFT then press ACQUIRE MENU n Press the main menu Limit Test Setup o Toggle the side menu Limit Test to ON p Toggle the side menu Ring Bell if Condition Met to ON TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 73 Performance Tests q Press the main menu Mode r Press the side menu Envelope s Usethe keypad to set envelope to use 100 acquisitions press 100 then ENTER t Press the main menu Stop After button u Press the side menu Single Acquisition Sequence v Confirm that the oscilloscope successfully makes 100 acquisitions If not successful the oscilloscope bell will ring When the word Run in the top left corner of the display chan
228. or vendor s part number Abbreviations Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI Y 1 1 1972 Mfr Code to Manufacturer The following table cross indexes codes names and addresses of manufacturers Cross Index or vendors of components listed in the parts list 10 2 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Mechanical Parts List Manufacturers Cross Index Mfr code Manufacturer 53109 FELLER TKOIK MODERN METALS TK0488 CURRAN COIL SPRING INC TK0588 UNIVERSAL PRECISION PRODUCTS TK1163 POLYCAST INC TK1465 BEAVERTON PARTS MFG CO TK2162 DERBY MFG TK2248 WESTERN MICRO TECHNOLOGY TK2338 ACC MATERIALS TK2432 UNION ELECTRIC TK2469 UNITREK CORPORATION TK2500 SOLECTEK ACCESSORIES CORP TK2539 ROYAL CASE CO INC TK2548 XEROX BUSINESS SERVICES DIV OF XEROX CORPORATION TK2597 MERIX CORPORATION 03LB0 SANDISK CORP 0 R05 TRIQUEST CORP 0J 9P9 GEROME MFG CO INC 0KB01 STAUFFER SUPPLY 0KB05 NORTH STAR NAMEPLATE 00779 AMP INC 07416 NELSON NAME PLATE CO 1DM20 PARLEX CORPORATION LAMINATED CABLE DIV 16 54 ZYTEC CORPORATION 1JJ96 KAM ELECTRIC CO 11536 OPTICAL COATING LABORATORY INC 2W733 COOPER INDUSTRIES INC BELDEN DIVISION 22526 BERG ELECTRONICS INC DUPONT 24931 SPECIALTY CONNECTOR CO INC Address 72 VERONICA AVE UNIT 4 UNIT A K 5 F GOLD KING IND BLDG NO 35 41 TAI LIN ROAD 9265 SW 5TH 1775 NW 216TH 9898 SW TIGARD ST 1800 NW 216TH AVE 24350 STATE ROAD 23 S
229. oriDisplay numbers from 1 e with no of hex numbers module towards the period preceding pausing to back of the them flash c oscilloscope and cycle power 1 Perform the Display troubleshooting Does eem 1Note Set all the switches on S1001 back to procedure 1 DS1 flash 8 ep ace the then display the sequence All DRAM of hex numbers Processor Display pausing to module 1 flash a the closed position and cycle power before performing another procedure Replace the All DRAM Processor Display module 1 es Note The replacement module may not have the correct firmware loaded See page 6 58 for details on firmware updates Figure 6 26 Primary troubleshooting procedure cont TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 61 Troubleshooting This procedure assumes that the oscilloscope is up and running and you can read the display Select the extended diagnostics Does the menu and run all the test suites the Are any display report discussion of the Diagnostics on SONY page 6 57 explains how to do this reported The oscilloscope is ok Regardless of other failures did the Processor fail but the Acq P roc Interface and FP Proc Interface pass Yes EP Could Perform the P rocessor acquisition you locate a faulty A ps module using these Troubleshooting procedures procedures Did the Processor pass but something
230. ormation Do in reverse order steps a and b of the Circuit Board Removal From Assembly procedure on the previous page b Reinstall the A23 SerPar Board assembly in the oscilloscope Do in reverse order steps a and b of the Remove circuit board from assembly procedure shown above Then see the following procedure to complete reassembly of the oscilloscope m Rear Cover and Cabinet page 6 18 d To ensure the A23 SerPar Board is working correctly perform the power up short diagnostics procedure described on page 6 57 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 31 Removal and Installation Procedures A29 Video Trigger Board Additional modules Removed D1 bus and analog and digital power cables 1 Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed a Have handy a screwdriver with a size T 15 Torx tip Items 1 and 2 b Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram Outer Chassis Modules Figure 6 2 page 6 13 See also the A29 Video Trigger Board on Figure 6 14 page 6 34 Do the procedures A74 D1 Bus and Analog Power and Digital Power Cables and A23 SerPar Board that precede this procedure to remove those items It is not necessary to pull the A23 board assembly out entirely nor is it necessary to remove the cable connector from the A23 SerPar board to the A11 Processor Display board 2 Orient the oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the work surface and its front is faci
231. our require ments At Depot Service Tektronix offers several standard priced adjustment calibra tion and repair services W A single repair and or adjustment m Calibrations using equipment and procedures that meet the traceability standards specific to the local area Annual maintenance agreements that provide for either calibration and repair or calibration only of the oscilloscope Of these services the annual maintenance agreement offers a particularly cost effective approach to service for many owners of the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscopes Such agreements can be purchased to span several years On Site Service The annual maintenance agreement can be purchased with on site service with repair and calibration done at your facility This service reduces the time your oscilloscope is out of service when calibration or repair is required Tektronix supports repair to the module level by providing Module Exchange and Module Repair and Return Module Exchange This service reduces down time for repair by allowing you to exchange most modules for remanufactured ones Tektronix ships you an updated and tested exchange module from the Beaverton Oregon service center typically within 24 hours Each module comes with a 90 day service warranty Module Repair and Return This service returns to you within 10 days the same module that you shipped to Tektronix The module shipped is repaired tested and returned to
232. ow Initialize the oscilloscope by doing Press save recall SETUP Now press the main menu button TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Verification Procedures Initialize the oscilloscope Press save recall SETUP Now press the main menu button Recall Factory Setup then the side menu button OK Confirm Factory Init Where instructed to use a front panel button or knob or select from a main or side menu or verify a readout or status message the name of the button or knob appears in boldface type press SHIFT then UTILITY press the main menu button System until Cal is highlighted in the pop up menu Verify that the status message is Pass in the main menu under the Voltage Reference label STOP The STOP notation at the left is accompanied by information you must read to do the procedure properly Refer to Figure 4 1 Main menu refers to the menu that labels the seven menu buttons under the display side menu refers to the menu that labels the five buttons to the right of the display Pop up menu refers to a menu that pops up when a main menu button is pressed Position of waveform record relative to General purpose the screen and display readout He information mot F Graticule and waveforms gt Waveform reference symbols show ground levels Ik E and waveform sources Vertical sc
233. ow press the main menu button Time base then press the side menu button Delayed Triggerable Press the side menu button Delayed Only m Set the horizontal SCALE to 500 ps for the D Delayed time base Press the side menu button Main Only c Display the test signal m Set the generator frequency to full bandwidth as follows TDS 794D 2 GHz TDS 580D 680B 684B amp 784D 1 GHz TDS 520D 540D 620B 644B 724D amp 754D 500 MHz m Set the test signal amplitude for about five divisions on screen Now fine adjust the generator output until the CH 1 Amplitude readout indicates the amplitude is 500 mV Readout may fluctuate around 500 mV m Disconnect the leveling head at CH 1 and reconnect it to CH 1 through a 5X attenuator d Repeat step 4 substeps b and c only since only the full bandwidth is to be checked here NOTE You just checked the trigger sensitivity If desired you may repeat steps 1 through 4 for the other channels CH2 CH3 and CHA 5 Disconnect the hookup Disconnect the cable from the channel last tested TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 61 Performance Tests Output Signal Checks The procedure that follows checks those characteristics of the output signals that are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in Specifications The oscilloscope outputs these signals at its front and rear panels Check Outputs CH 3 Equipment AUX 1 on some models required
234. p after a single acquisition or sequence of acquisitions if acquiring in average or envelope modes or after a limit condition has been met Select channel sources for compliance with limit tests You can direct the TDS to signal you or generate hard copy output either to a printer or to a floppy disk file based on the results Also you can create templates for use in limit tests TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Specifications On Board User Assistance Help Autoset Help and autoset can assist you in setting up the oscilloscope to make your measurements Help displays operational information about any front panel control When help mode is in effect manipulating any front panel control causes the oscilloscope to display information about that control When help is first invoked an introduc tion to help is displayed on screen Autoset automatically sets up the oscilloscope for a viewable display based on the input signal Measurement Assistance Cursor Measure Once you have set up to make your measurements the cursor and measure features can help you quickly make those measurements Three types of cursors are provided for making parametric measurements on the displayed waveforms Horizontal bar cursors H Bar measure vertical parame ters typically volts Vertical bar cursors V Bar measure horizontal parameters typically time or frequency Paired cursors measure both amplitude and time simulta
235. pe can also output copies of its display using the hardcopy feature This feature allows you to output waveforms and other on screen information to a variety of graphic printers and plotters from the TDS front panel providing hard copies without requiring you to put the TDS into a system controller environment You can make hardcopies in a variety of popular output formats such as PCX TIFF BMP RLE EPS Interleaf and EPS mono or color You can also save hardcopies in a disk file in any of the formats listed in the I O section TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Specifications The hardcopies obtained are based on what is displayed on screen at the time hardcopy is invoked The hardcopies can be stamped with date and time and spooled to a queue for printing at a later time You can output screen information via GPIB RS 232 C or Centronics interfaces Display The TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscopes offer flexible display options You can customize the following attributes of your display Color TDS 644B TDS 684B and TDS 700D Waveforms readouts graticule and variable persistence with color coding Intensity waveforms readouts and graticule Style of waveform display s vectors or dots intensified or nonintensified samples infinite persistence and variable persistence Interpolation method Sin x x or Linear Display format xy or yt with various graticule selections including NTSC and PAL t
236. play system Table 1 7 Nominal traits GPIB interface output ports and power fuse vinene ar ense E OU RO Knit mae eoa iei eere Table 1 8 Nominal traits Data handling and reliability Table 1 9 Nominal traits Mechanical Table 1 10 Warranted characteristics Signal acquisition system Table 1 11 Warranted characteristics Time base system Table 1 12 Warranted characteristics Triggering system Table 1 13 Warranted characteristics Output ports probe compensator and power requirements Table 1 14 Warranted characteristics Environmental Table 1 15 Certifications and compliances Table 1 16 Typical characteristics Signal acquisition system Table 1 17 Typical characteristics Triggering system Table 2 1 Power cord conductor identification Table 2 2 Power cord identification eee Table 2 3 Effects of corrupted data Table 4 1 Test equipment Table 4 2 DC offset accuracy zero setting Table 4 3 DC Voltage measurement accuracy Table 4 4 Analog bandwidth eee Table 4 5 Delay between channels worksheet Table 4 6 Trigger level accuracy readout Table 4
237. pose knob to select the file to save Save the file as in step e W Press the side menu button Save To Selected File 2 Verify the file system works Press the main menu button Recall Factory Setup and the side menu button OK Confirm Factory Init to restore the 500 us time base and the five cycle waveform W Press the main menu button Recall Saved Setup then press the side menu button From File m Turn the general purpose knob to select the file to recall For example if you followed the instructions previously and saved the file to either the floppy disk drive fd0 or the optional hard disk drive hd0 you had the oscilloscope assign the name TEK00000 SET to your file Press the side menu button Recall From Selected File m Verify that the oscilloscope retrieved the saved setup from the disk Do this by noticing the horizontal SCALE for the M main time base is again 200 us and the waveform shows only two cycles just as it was when you saved the setup 3 Remove the test hookup m Disconnect the probe from the channel input and the probe compensa tion terminals m Remove the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual I Performance Tests Prerequisites This section contains a collection of procedures for checking that the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscopes perform as warranted The procedu
238. pproximately 9 psi 2 Remove any remaining dust with a lint free cloth dampened in isopropyl alcohol 75 solution and rinse with warm deionized water A cotton tipped applicator is useful for cleaning in narrow spaces and on circuit boards STOP If after doing steps I and 2 a module is clean upon inspection skip the remaining steps 3 Ifsteps 1 and 2 do not remove all the dust or dirt the oscilloscope may be spray washed using a solution of 75 isopropyl alcohol by doing steps 4 through 8 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Maintenance 4 Gain access to the parts to be cleaned by removing easily accessible shields and panels see Removal and Installation Procedures 5 Spray wash dirty parts with the isopropyl alcohol and wait 60 seconds for the majority of the alcohol to evaporate 6 Use hot 120 F to 140 F deionized water to thoroughly rinse them 7 Dry all parts with low pressure deionized air 8 Dry all components and assemblies in an oven or drying compartment using low temperature 125 F to 150 F circulating air Lubrication There is no periodic lubrication required for this oscilloscope TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 7 Maintenance 6 8 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual E ee eee Removal and Installation Procedures This subsection contains procedures for removal and installation of all mechani cal and electrical modules Any elec
239. r for use with the AM 503S A6302 A6312 and P6021 Peak pulse 20 kA 0 5 Hz to 20 MHz with AM 5035 6302 P6408 Logic probe 17 bit TTL TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Options and Accessories Accessory Software The optional accessories listed in Table 7 5 are Tektronix software products recommended for use with your oscilloscope Table 7 5 Accessory software Software Part number Wavewriter AWG and waveform creation S3FT400 WaveStar Waveform capture and documentation WSTR31 WaveStar 98 Waveform capture and documentation WSTR98 Windows 95 version Telecommunication Package and i Pattern Software TTiP Warranty Information Check for the full warranty statements for this product and the products listed above on the first page after the title page of each product manual TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 7 9 Options and Accessories 7 10 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual a Electrical Parts List The modules that make up this instrument are often a combination of mechanical and electrical subparts Therefore all replaceable modules are listed in Section 10 Mechanical Parts List Refer to that section for part numbers when using this manual TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 8 1 Electrical Parts List 8 2 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual IE
240. r Sensor Splitter Power 250 kHz to 1 GHz Variable amplitude from 60 mV to 2 Vp p into 50 6 MHz reference Frequency range 10 MHz to 1 GHz Amplitude range 6 mV to 2 Vp p Frequency range DC to 1 GHz Tracking 22 096 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Rohde amp Schwarz SMT or SMY13 Rohde amp Schwarz URV 35 with NRV Z8 power sensor Rohde amp Schwarz RVZ13 Software based Adjustments Sinewave leveling during soft ware based adjustments Sinewave leveling during soft ware based adjustments Adjustment Procedures Table 5 4 Test Equipment Fixtures and Supplies Cont Item Number and Description Minimum Requirements Example Purpose 16 Magnifier 6X Standard Tool Brightness and Focus Adjust ment 17 Photometer 0 1 to 200 Footlamberts Tektronix J 17 Photometer with Contrast Adjustment 1803 Luminance P robe 18 Probe 10X optional ac A P6139A Probe Tektronix P6139A Probe Adjustment cessory 19 Pulser Tunnel Diode Tektronix part number Tektronix part number Probe Adjustment 067 0681 01 067 0681 01 20 Generator Optical Impulse 850 nm optical impulse Tektronix 016501 Optical Im Option 3C Software based pulse Generator Adjustments 21 Generator Optical Impulse 1300 nm optical impulse Tektronix 016502 Optical Im Option 4C Software based pulse Generator Adjustments 22 Attenuator Optical 62 5 micron optical attenuator Tektronix OA
241. r TDS 500D 700D The TDS 794D Test Record begins on page 4 26 TDS 500D 700D Test Record Instrument Serial Number Certificate Number Temperature RH Date of Calibration Technician TDS 500D 700D Performance Test Minimum e Incoming Outgoing Maximum Offset Accuracy CH1 Offset 1 mV 1 6 mV 101 mV 25 1 mV 1 01 V 251 mV CH2 Offset 1 mV 1 6 mV 101 mV 25 1 mV 1 01 V 251 mV CH3 or AX1 Offset 1 mV 1 6 mV 101 mV 25 1 mV 1 01 V 251 mV CH4 or AX2 Offset 1 mV 1 6 mV 101 mV 25 1 mV 1 01 V 251 mV DC Voltage Measurement Accuracy Averaged CH1 5 mV Vert scale setting 1 0355 V 5 Div position setting 1 V offset CH1 5 mV Vert scale setting 1 0445 V 1 0355 V 5 Div position setting 1 V offset CH1 200 mV Vert scale setting 11 5195 V 11 6805 V 5 Div position setting 10 V offset 1 0445 V CH1 200 mV Vert scale setting 11 6805 V 11 5195 V 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH1 1 01 V Vert scale setting 17 621 V 18 379 V 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH1 1 01 V Vert scale setting 18 379 V 17 621 V 5 Div position setting 10 V offset CH2 5 mV Vert scale setting PRO3S5M Wee ke 1 0445 V 5 Div position setting 1 V offset CH2 5 mV Vert scale setting 1 0445V 0 fo P ________ 1 0355 V 5 Div position setting 1 V offset CH2 200 mV Vert scale setting 15195 fo 11 6805 V 5 Div position setting 10
242. r oscilloscope Electrical Parts List contains a statement referring you to Mechanical Replaceable Parts where both electrical and mechanical modules are listed m Diagrams contains a block diagram and an interconnection diagram useful for isolating failed modules m Mechanical Parts List includes a table of all replaceable modules their descriptions and their Tektronix part numbers This manual uses certain conventions which you should become familiar with before doing service Throughout this manual any replaceable component assembly or part of these oscilloscopes is referred to generically as a module In general a module is an assembly like a circuit board rather than a component like a resistor or an integrated circuit Sometimes a single component is a module for example each chassis part of the oscilloscope is a module Some TDS models have two auxiliary channels called AUX 1 and AUX 2 instead of CH 3 and CH 4 References to these channels default to CH 3 and CH 4 If your oscilloscope is one of models TDS 520D TDS 620B TDS 680B or TDS 724D read AUX 1 and AUX 2 respectively for all references to CH 3 and CH 4 in this manual Symbols and terms related to safety appear in the Safety Summary found at the beginning of this manual Besides the symbols related to safety this manual uses the following symbols STOP The stop labels information which must be read in order to correctly do service and to avoid incor
243. rcuits As you run the calibration tests the software adjusts the circuits using external standards you provide in response to prompts on the computer TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Adjustment Procedures screen Your role then is to provide those test signals and to prompt the computer to continue Since the display assembly and P6139A probe adjustment require manual adjustment of circuit components they are not part of the adjustment software Written procedures for these adjustments start on page 5 6 If you are using the optional P6139A probe do the manual adjustment proce dures found at the end of this section Complete Adjustment complete adjustment is the performance of all adjustments on the TDS 600B Adjustment Software and the TDS 700D Adjustment Software in sequence plus the P6139A probe adjustment if you are using the P6139A probe Throughout this section complete adjustment is used as just defined Individual Adjustments The adjustment software contains three classes of adjustments as shown in Table 5 1 Each class contains one or more individual calibration tests and an internal compensation routine SPC The Adjustment Software and the release notes on disk provide you with instructions for running each of the tests All these software based adjustments are made internally by the adjustment software and all adjustments can be done without removal of the oscilloscope cabinet S
244. re 5 9 Locations of P6139A Probe Adjustments 5 19 Figure 5 10 Adjustments versus front corner response 5 20 Figure 5 11 Five and Ten Percent Luminance Patches 5 22 Figure 6 1 External modules 6 12 Figure 6 2 Outer chassis modules ee eee 6 13 Figure 6 3 Inner chassis 6 14 Figure 6 4 Knob removal 6 17 Figure 6 5 Line fuse and line cord removal 6 18 Figure 6 6 Rear cover and cabinet removal 6 21 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual V Table of Contents vi Figure 6 7 panel re Front cover trim ring menu buttons and attenuator moval front cover not Shown Figure 6 8 A12 Front panel assembly removal Figure 6 9 Figure 6 10 removal Figure 6 11 Figure 6 12 Figure 6 13 Figure 6 14 Figure 6 15 Figure 6 16 Figure 6 17 Figure 6 18 Figure 6 19 Figure 6 20 Figure 6 21 Figure 6 22 Figure 6 23 Figure 6 24 Figure 6 25 Figure 6 26 Figure 6 27 Figure 6 28 troubles Figure 6 29 Cabinet modules removal eee A14 DI bus and analog power and digital power cables Remove circuit board assembly from oscilloscope Remove circuit board from assembly Circuit board installed
245. rectly using or applying service procedures D The clock icon labels procedure steps which require a pause to wait for the oscilloscope to complete some operation before you can continue TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Preface Various icons such as the example icon at the left are used in procedures to help identify certain readouts and menu functions on screen Related Manuals The TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscopes come with the following manuals TDS 500D TDS 600B amp TDS700D User Manual Tektronix part number 071 0130 XX contains a tutorial to quickly show you how to operate the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscopes and an in depth discussion of how to more completely use their features Applications are also discussed TDS 500D TDS 600B amp TDS 700D Reference Tektronix part number 071 0137 XX contains a brief overview of oscilloscope operation TDS Family 500D 600B and 700D Programmer Diskette part of the User Manual contains information for programmed operation via the GPIB interface Included are the complete command set setup information and programming examples TDS 500D TDS 600B amp TDS 700D Technical Reference Tektronix part number 071 0135 XX contains performance verification procedures and specifications TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual xvii Preface Contacting Tektronix Product For application oriented questions about a Tektronix m
246. removal 6 21 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures Front Cover Trim Ring 6 22 Menu Buttons and Attenuator Panel E Menu Buttons Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed No tools are needed Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram External modules Figure 6 1 Orient the oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope so its rear is down on the work surface and its bottom is facing you Remove the front cover Grasp the front cover by its left and right edges and snap it off of the front subpanel When reinstalling align and snap back on Remove the trim ring Grasp the trim ring by its top edge and pry it up and lift it forward to snap it off of the front subpanel If servicing the menu buttons lift them out of the trim ring When reinstalling reinsert the menu buttons align the trim ring to the front subpanel and press it back on See Figure 6 7 Trim Ring When removing the trim ring grasp its back edge and vigorously flex it upward before pulling it forward Attenuator Panel Figure 6 7 Front cover trim ring menu buttons and attenuator panel removal front cover not shown TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures STOP DO NOT touch the carbon contact points on the menu buttons installed in t
247. removing any board mount a flat bladed screwdriver Item 5 b Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram Outer Chassis Modules Figure 6 2 page 6 13 6 38 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures c Do the procedures A74 DI Bus and Analog Power and Digital Power Cables page 6 28 A23 SerPar Board page 6 30 if option 05 is installed A29 Video Trigger Board page 6 32 and A11 Processor Dis play Board page 6 35 to remove those modules 2 Orient the oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the work surface and its front is facing you 3 Remove the top cover Remove the 12 screws securing the top cover to the main chassis then slide it back until its front edge clears the retainers in the front subpanel Lift the top cover away to complete removal 4 Remove the board mount s From the top side of the top cover use the flat bladed screwdriver to pry up the retainer lug until it clears the slot in the front cover While holding the lug clear of the slot push the mount towards the rear until it releases When reinstalling be sure to align the lug properly and be sure it snaps into its slot Figure 6 17 Board bracket removal 5 Reinstallation a Do in reverse order steps 3 and 4 reversing the procedure outlined in each step to reinstall the assembly Then see the following procedures in the order listed to complete reassembly of
248. res are arranged in four logical groupings Signal Acquisition System Checks Time Base System Checks Triggering System Checks and Output Ports Checks They check all the characteristics that are designated as checked in Specifications The characteristics that are checked appear in boldface type under Warranted Characteristics in Specifications STOP These procedures extend the confidence level provided by the basic procedures described on page 4 5 The basic procedures should be done first then these procedures performed if desired The tests in this section comprise an extensive valid confirmation of perform ance and functionality when the following requirements are met m The cabinet must be installed on the oscilloscope m You must have performed and passed the procedures under Self Tests found on page 4 5 and those under Functional Tests found on page 4 7 W A signal path compensation must have been done within the recommended calibration interval and at a temperature within 5 C of the present operating temperature If at the time you did the prerequisite Self Tests the temperature was within the limits just stated consider this prerequisite met m The oscilloscope must have been last adjusted at an ambient temperature between 420 C and 4 30 C must have been operating for a warm up period of at least 20 minutes and must be operating at an ambient tempera ture between 4 C and either 45 C for the TDS
249. reversing each step to reinstall the acquisition board Then see the following procedures in the order listed to complete reassembly of the oscilloscope Wm 4 DI Bus and Analog Power and Digital Power Cables page 6 28 m Front Cover Trim Ring Menu Buttons and Attenuator Panel page 6 22 m Rear Cover and Cabinet page 6 18 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 41 Removal and Installation Procedures Securing A14 D1 Bus Screws 6 AUX ig TRIGGER Digital Power Cable SIGNAL INPUT TRIGGER OUTPUT Analog DELAYED Power Cable TRIGGER Securing Screws 5 Figure 6 18 A10 Acquisition board removal 6 42 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures Floppy Disk Drive 1 Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed a Have handy a screwdriver with a small Phillips head b Locate the modules to be removed including those listed under Additional Modules Removed in the locator diagram Outer Chassis Modules Figure 6 2 page 6 13 2 Do the procedure Front Cover Trim Ring Menu Buttons and Attenuator Panel page 6 22 3 Orient the oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope so its top is down on the work surface and its front is facing you 4 Remove the floppy disk drive Use Figure 6 19 as a guide a Unplug the J38 connector ribbon interconnect cable that connects the disk driv
250. rm Disconnect all test equipment TSG 121 from the oscilloscope Turn off cursors by pressing CURSOR then the main menu Function button and finally Off from the side menu 7 Check the Sync Duty Cycle a Set up oscilloscope for Sync Duty Cycle Test Press TRIGGER MENU Press the Standard pop up to select FlexFmt Trigger Type should already be set to Video Press the main menu Setup Press the side menu Field Rate Use the keypad to set the field rate to 60 05 Hz press 60 05 then ENTER Press the side menu Lines Use the keypad to set the field rate to 793 lines press 793 then ENTER Press the side menu Fields TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests Use the keypad to set the number of fields to 1 press 1 then ENTER Press the side menu Sync Width Use the keypad to set the width to 400 ns press 400 SHIFT n then ENTER Press the side menu 1 of 2 Then press V1 Start Time Use the keypad to set V1 start time to 10 10 us press 10 10 SHIFT u then ENTER Press the side menu V1 Stop Time Use the keypad to set V1 stop time to 10 50 us press 10 50 SHIFT u then ENTER Press the main menu Type pop up to select Edge Press HORIZONTAL MENU Press the main menu Record Length Select the side menu 1000 points in 20div If needed first press the side menu more until you see the appropriate side menu item Turn the HORIZONTAL POSITION
251. round 250 mV Check the AUX trigger source for stable triggering at limits Do the following in the order listed W Use the definition for stable trigger from step 2 m Press TRIGGER MENU then press the main menu button Source Press the side menu button more until the side menu label DC Aux appears then press DC Aux m Press SET LEVEL TO 50 CHECK that a stable trigger is obtained for the test waveform on both the positive and negative slopes Press the main menu button Slope then use the side menu to switch between trigger slopes Use the TRIGGER LEVEL knob to stabilize the trigger if required m Enter the pass fail result on the test record TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests m Leave the Main trigger system triggered on the positive slope of the waveform before proceeding to the next check Press the main menu button Source then press the side menu button more until CH 1 appears Press CH 1 4 Confirm that the Main and Delayed trigger systems are within sensitivity limits full bandwidth a Hook up the test signal source Disconnect the hookup installed in step 1 Connect the signal output of a high frequency sine wave generator to CH 1 Some TDS models need a high frequency 2500 MHz generator see footnotes 1 and 4 in Table 4 1 b Set the Main and Delayed Horizontal Scales m Set the horizontal SCALE to 500 ps for the M Main time base m Press HORIZONTAL MENU N
252. rtical position of any channel during this procedure Set the horizontal SCALE to 500 ps m Press SHIFT then press ACQUIRE MENU m Press the main menu button Mode and then press the side menu button Average 16 c Hook up the test signal source m Connect the sine wave output of a sine wave generator to a 50 Q precision coaxial cable followed by a 50 Q termination and a dual input coupler If checking a TDS 794D substitute a power divider and two 50 2 coaxial cables for the 50 2 termination and dual input coupler m Connect the coupler to both CH 1 and CH 2 See Figure 4 10 Sine Wave Generator Oscilloscope Output L Dual input coupler 50 Figure 4 10 Initial test hookup TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests 2 Confirm all four channels are within limits for channel delay a Set up the generator Set the generator frequency to 250 MHz and the amplitude for about six divisions in CH 1 Hint As you are adjusting the generator amplitude push SET LEVEL TO 50 frequently to speed up the updating of the waveform amplitude on screen The horizontal SCALE should already be set to 500 ps On the TDS 580D TDS 784D TDS 794D and 600B now set it to 200 ps On the TDS 520D 540D 724D and 754D push the front panel ZOOM button press the side menu On button set the horizontal SCALE to 250 ps
253. rvice Manual 1 3 Specifications 1 4 Table 1 2 Record length and divisions per record vs TDS model Standard Models All TDS 5000 TDS600B amp TDS 700D 500 10 divs 10 divs All channels4 TDS 500D amp TDS 700D All channels Models with Option 1M TDS 500D amp TDS 700D All channels TDS 500D amp TDS 700D All channels TDS 500D amp TDS 700D All channels TDS 520D One channel only TDS 540D TDS 580D amp AIITDS 700D One or two channels One channel only Divisions per record Record length FTS Off FTS On 1 000 20 divs 10 divs 2 500 10 divs 5 000 10 divs 15 15000 300 300dw 10 divs a 000 1 000 LL 10 divs Divisions per record Record length FTS Off FTS On 75 000 1 500 divs 10 divs 100 000 2 000 divs 10 divs 130 000 i 10 divs 250 000 i i 10 divs TDS 540D TDS 580D amp AIITDS 700D 500 000 10 000 divs 10 divs TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Specifications Table 1 2 Record length and divisions per record vs TDS model cont Divisions per record Models with Option 2M Record length FTS Off FTS On TDS 520D amp TDS 724D 2 000 000 40 000 divs 10 divs One or two channels TDS 540D TDS 580D TDS 754D TDS 784D amp TDS 794D Three or four channels TDS 520D amp TDS 724D 80 000 divs 10 divs One channel only TDS 540D TDS 580D TDS 754D TDS 784D amp TDS 794D Two channels TDS 540D TDS 754D 8 000 000
254. rvicing the line fuse do the next step if you are servicing the line cord skip to step 4 3 Remove line fuse Find the fuse cap on the rear panel See Figure 6 5 Now remove the fuse cap by turning it counterclockwise using a flat bladed screwdriver and remove the line fuse Reverse procedure to reinstall 4 Remove line cord Find the line cord on the rear cover See Figure 6 5 Now remove the line cord retaining clamp by first unplugging the line cord from its receptacle Next grasp both the line cord and the retaining clamp and rotate it 90 degrees counterclockwise Pull the line cord and clamp away to complete the removal Reverse procedure to reinstall TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 17 Removal and Installation Procedures 5 Reinstallation Do in reverse steps 3 and 4 to reinstall the line cord and then the line fuse Line Fuse Fuse Cap Figure 6 5 Line fuse and line cord removal EMI Gaskets See Rear Cover and Cabinet procedure on page 6 18 Rear Cover and Cabinet 1 Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed a Have handy a screwdriver with a size T 20 Torx tip Items 1 and 3 b Make sure the oscilloscope s front cover is installed if it s not install it by snapping its edges over the trim ring Locate the rear cover and cabinet in the locator diagram External modules Figure 6 1 2 Orient the oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope so
255. s Figure 9 1 Interconnections Figure 9 2 Block 6 22 6 24 6 27 6 29 6 30 6 31 6 33 6 34 6 36 6 38 6 39 6 42 6 44 6 46 6 48 6 50 6 51 6 53 6 58 6 60 6 62 6 63 6 64 6 65 6 66 6 66 6 67 6 68 6 69 6 70 6 71 9 4 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Table of Contents Figure 10 1 External modules 10 7 Figure 10 2 Outer chassis modules 10 10 Figure 10 3 Inner chassis 10 12 Figure 10 4 Cables bottom view 10 14 Figure 10 5 Cables top 10 16 Figure 10 6 Floppy disk drive 10 18 Figure 10 7 Accessories 10 20 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual vii Table of Contents List of Tables viii Table 1 1 Key features of the TDS 500D 600B and 700D oscillosc pes m ntn ECHO weave ta I ie ee Reg Table 1 2 Record length and divisions per record vs TDS model Table 1 3 Nominal traits Signal acquisition system Table 1 4 Nominal traits Time base system Table 1 5 Nominal traits Triggering system Table 1 6 Nominal traits Dis
256. s Voltage Reference Frequency Response and Pulse Trigger See Figure 4 2 f Runthe signal path compensation Press the main menu button Signal Path then press the side menu button OK Compensate Signal Paths g Wait Signal path compensation may take five minutes on the TDS 500D 700D and fifteen minutes on the 600B to run While it progresses a clock icon shown at left is displayed on screen When compensation completes the status message will be updated to Pass or Fai lin the main menu See step h h Confirm signal path compensation returns passed status Verify that the word Pass appears under Signal Path in the main menu See Figure 4 2 Tek Run 100kS s Sample Lia Signal Path Compensation SPC corrects for DC inaccuracies caused bv temperature variations and or long term drift SPC can be run time after the oscilloscope is RET and should be run whenever the oscilloscope s ambient temperature has changed by more than 5 C or once a week if vertical settings of 5mV div or less are used Diag Err System iCal Y Input signals ith AC components Disconnect or otherwise se signals prior i 15 minutes to run oltage Frequency ulse Reference Response Trigger Pass Pass pass Signal Path ompensatio OK Compensate Signal Paths 3 2 Verify Pass Verify Pass
257. s adjusted properly No test equipment or hookups are required Equipment None required Prerequisites Power on the oscilloscope and allow a 20 minute warm up before doing this procedure 1 Verify that internal diagnostics pass Do the following substeps to verify passing of internal diagnostics a Display the System diagnostics menu m Press SHIFT then press UTILITY m Repeatedly press the main menu button System until Diag Err is highlighted in the pop up menu b Run the System Diagnostics m First disconnect any input signals from all four channels W Press the main menu button Execute then press the side menu button OK Confirm Run Test c Wait The internal diagnostics do an exhaustive verification of proper oscilloscope function This verification will take up to three and a half minutes on some models When the verification is finished the resulting status will appear on the screen d Verify that no failures are found and reported on screen If any failures occur do step 1a then press the main menu button Error Log for details e Confirm the three adjustment sections have passed status TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 5 Brief Procedures Highlight Cal 1 4 6 Press SHIFT then press UTILITY Highlight Cal in the pop up menu by repeatedly pressing the main menu button System See Figure 4 2 Verify that the word Pass appears in the main menu under the following menu label
258. s for reinstalling the remaining modules m Cover and Board Brackets page 6 38 m All Processor Display Board page 6 35 m If option 05 is installed A29 Video Trigger Board page 6 32 m A14 DI Bus and Analog Power and Digital Power Cables page 6 28 m Front Cover Trim Ring Menu Buttons and Attenuator Panel page 6 22 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures W Rear Cover and Cabinet page 6 18 Figure 6 24 Front subpanel removal Main Chassis Additional Modules Removed All 1 Remove the main chassis Since the removal of the main chassis requires the removal of virtually all modules do the procedure Disassembly for Cleaning that follows While doing Disassembly for Cleaning you will remove the front panel assembly Ignore the instructions to disassemble that assembly 2 Reinstallation See reinstallation instructions in Disassembly for Cleaning TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 53 Removal and Installation Procedures Disassembly for Cleaning 6 54 This procedure is for disassembly of the digitizing oscilloscope into its individual modules so they can be cleaned For the cleaning instructions see nspection and Cleaning which begins this section 1 2 3 Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed a Have handy a screwdriver with a size T 15 Torx 9 tip Items 1 and 2 a T 20 Torx O tip I
259. s indicated by the display not updating TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 11 Brief Procedures m Pressing SET LEVEL 50 triggers the signal that you just left untriggered Leave the signal triggered 3 Verify that the delayed trigger system operates a Select the delayed time base Press HORIZONTAL MENU Press the main menu button Time Base Press the side menu button Delayed Triggerable then press the side menu button Delayed Only Set the horizontal SCALE for the D delayed time base to 200 us Select the delayed trigger level menu Press SHIFT then press DELAYED TRIG Press the main menu button Level then press the side menu button Level Confirm that the following statements are true The trigger level readout for the delayed trigger system changes as you turn the general purpose knob As you rotate the general purpose knob the square wave probe com pensation signal can become triggered and untriggered Leave the signal untriggered which is indicated by the display not updating Pressing the side menu button Set to 50 triggers the probe com pensation signal that you just left untriggered Leave the signal triggered Verify the delayed trigger counter Press the main menu button Delay by Time Use the keypad to enter a delay time of 1 second Press 1 then press ENTER Verify that the trigger READY indicator on the front panel flashes about once every second as
260. s to be removed Have handy a Supply screwdriver with a size T 15 Torx tip Items 1 and 2 Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram Inner Chassis Modules Figure 6 2 page 6 13 2 Orient the oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the work surface and its rear is facing you 3 Remove the low voltage power supply a Working from the rear of the oscilloscope remove the two screws securing the low voltage power supply to the rear chassis See Fig ure 6 21 Now working from the top of the oscilloscope remove the seven screws indicated in Figure 6 21 that mount the supply to the main chassis Grasp the supply at the points indicated in Figure 6 21 and lift the board up out of the oscilloscope to complete removal 4 Reinstallation Do in reverse order substeps 3a through 3c reversing each step to reinstall the low voltage power supply Then see the following procedures to complete the reassembly Top Cover and Board Brackets page 6 38 11 Processor Display Board page 6 35 If option 05 is installed A29 Video Trigger Board page 6 32 A14 DI Bus and Analog Power and Digital Power Cables page 6 28 Rear Cover and Cabinet page 6 18 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 47 Removal and Installation Procedures Rotate the edge of the board upward as indicated to clear the lip of the main chassis when lifting this board out
261. screen NOTE Press SHIFT to change the horizontal position speed The position moves faster when SHIFT is lighted m Adjust the HORIZONTAL POSITION control to move the beginning of the FFT data record onto the display NOTE Expanding the horizontal scale of the FFT waveform gives greater resolution when making cursor measurements Expand the FFT to display DC to the highest frequency listed in Table 4 12 for the standard being verified m Adjust the HORIZONTAL SCALE and VERTICAL SCALE to view the frequency response of the BT filter The large spike around DC is due to DC offset in the signal and should be ignored 5 Observe the desired response characteristics using the vertical paired cursors see figures 4 45 and 4 46 a Press CURSOR b Press the main menu button Function then press the side menu button Paired Press CLEAR MENU NOTE Pressing SHIFT will change cursor speed Use the select key to alternate between cursors d Position one cursor at the beginning of the FFT record e Position the other cursor at the bit rate the frequency closest to the bit rate of the mask that is turned on see Table 4 12 and Figure 4 45 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 97 Performance Tests 4 98 Tek Run 200GS s ET Sample amp 11 098 Mask 620MHz2 Options 122 2 dE Mask Source chi Mask Display OFF Std Mask
262. ses through the A12 Front Panel board and the A11 DRAM Processor Display board to the low voltage power supply The front panel also generates the probe compensation signals SIGNAL and GND Rear Panel The GPIB connector provides access to stored waveforms and allows external control of the oscilloscope You can make hardcopies on the GPIB RS 232 and Centronics ports Low Voltage Power The low voltage power supply is a switching power converter with active power Supply factor control It supplies power to all of the circuitry in the oscilloscope The principal POWER switch located on the rear panel controls all power to the oscilloscope including the Low Voltage Power Supply The ON STBY switch located on the front panel also controls all of the power to the oscillo scope except for part of the circuitry in the Low Voltage Power Supply The power supply sends a power fail PF warning to the processor system if the power is going down Fan The fan provides forced air cooling for the oscilloscope It connects to 25 V from the Low Voltage Power Supply by way of the 11 DRAM Processor Dis play module TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 3 3 Theory of Operation 3 4 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual M DU D ea C Performance Verification Procedures Two types of Performance Verification procedures can be performed on this product Brief Procedures and Performance Tests You may not need to
263. sn 4 81 Figure 4 37 Line count accuracy correct result waveform 4 82 Figure 4 38 Setup for sync duty cycle test 4 84 Figure 4 39 Sync duty cycle test one div neg pulse waveform 4 85 Figure 4 40 Sync duty cycle test critically adjusted pulse 4 86 Figure 4 41 Sine wave generator leveling equipment setup 4 88 Figure 4 42 Equipment setup for maximum amplitude 4 90 Figure 4 43 Reference receiver performance verification set up 4 93 Figure 4 44 Optical impulse of Ch1 input from 5022 Optical Atten uator OIG501 OIG502 fed into optical attenuator in Step 1 4 95 Figure 4 45 Optical impulse response for OC 12 SONET Reference R celver oos e obra ren ERR DOCU C Rie EEE XR e 4 98 Figure 4 46 Optical impulse response for OC 12 SONET Reference R c elver eree deve ie Ere I dew ra YI Ne PUE E oe aves 4 99 Figure 5 1 Accessing the protection switch 5 9 Figure 5 2 Hookup for probe compensation 5 11 Figure 5 3 Performing probe compensation 5 12 Figure 5 4 Proper and improper probe compensation 5 12 Figure 5 5 Exposing the Inner Probe Tip 5 13 Figure 5 6 Initial test hookup 5 14 Figure 5 7 Exposing the probe body 5 16 Figure 5 8 Initial test hookup 5 17 Figu
264. ssor display board Disconnect the flex board connector at P3 of the front panel assembly The flex board is part of the display frame assembly Disconnect cable W76 See Figure 6 8 c Finally lift the front panel assembly out of the front subpanel to complete the removal TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 23 Removal and Installation Procedures Disconnect Stud Mount Torx drive Screw T 15 W76 Cable Power Assembly DN a Sem Front P anel Assembly Backof Front Panel S Assembly Ni S S z lt eA o d Sz Ua Ground Figure 6 8 A12 Front panel assembly removal Display Frame Assembly 1 Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed Have handy a screwdriver with a size T 15 Torx 9 Items 1 and 2 Locate the modules to be removed in the locator diagram Outer chassis modules Figure 6 2 page 6 13 2 Orient the oscilloscope Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the work surface and its front is facing you 6 24 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures 3 Remove the display frame assembly a Do procedure Front Cover Trim Ring Menu Buttons and Attenuator Panel page 6 22 to remove the front cover and trim ring b Liftthe front panel assembly out of the front subpanel until you can reach J2 on the front panel assembly Disconnect the flex cab
265. st alteration a Locate the two small access holes on the right side of the oscilloscope cabinet near the front See Figure 5 1 b Insert the adjustment tool Item 4 in the hole nearest the rear of the oscilloscope about 1 2 inch to engage the rocker switch TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 5 9 Adjustment Procedures Push to rock the switch to its protected disabled position d Todo complete adjustment as defined on page 5 3 you must also do the procedure Compensate the Probe on page 5 10 if you are using the optional P6139A probe Probe Adjustment for the P6139A Probe STOP It is not necessary to do this procedure to perform a complete adjustment unless you are using the optional P6139A probe This probe adjustment is divided into three parts Compensate the Probe Measure the Probe Bandwidth and Adjust the Probe High Frequency Response If probe bandwidth is within required limits you will be instructed to not do the high frequency response adjustment Compensate the Probe Equipment One P6139A probe Item 18 required 1 Install the test hookup and preset the oscilloscope controls a Hook up test signal source Install the optional accessory probe to CH 1 Connect the probe tip to PROBE COMPENSATION SIGNAL on the front panel connect the probe ground to PROBE COMPENSATION GND See Figure 5 2 5 10 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Adjustment Procedures
266. stments affect TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Adjustment Procedures Not Used R2 5 LF Comp Figure 5 9 Locations of P6139A Probe Adjustments m See Figure 5 10 to see what areas on the front corner that the various adjustments affect d Recheck Probe Bandwidth m Redo the procedure Adjust Probe High Frequency Response to check if probe now meets its bandwidth requirement m If the bandwidth requirement is met adjustment is complete Skip to step 3 m If the bandwidth requirement is not met redo this procedure increasing front corner overshoot slightly relative to the stored waveform m Repeat this step d until the bandwidth requirement is met TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 5 19 Adjustment Procedures 20 ns R1 10 ns Adjust R1 for best overall match 2 Adjust R2 and C1 for best match between front corners 3 Repeat the first two steps as needed due to interaction between adjustments Figure 5 10 Adjustments versus front corner response 3 Disconnect the hookup Unplug the probe from the BNC to probe tip adapter Reverse the instructions in Figure 5 5 page 5 13 to reinstall the retractable probe tip 5 20 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Adjustment Procedures Display Assembly Adjustment STOP It is not necessary to do this procedure to perform a complete adjustment Only use this procedure to adjust
267. t male BNC output 011 0102 01 Equipped Instruments Only 24 Generator Optical Im 850 nm optical impulse Tektronix 016501 Optical Checking Option 3C pulse Impulse Generator 25 Generator Optical Im 1300 nm optical impulse Tektronix 016 502 Optical Checking Option 4C pulse Impulse Generator 26 Attenuator Optical 62 5 micron optical attenuator Tektronix 0A5022 Optical Checking Option 3C and 4C Attenuator 27 Cable Fiber Optic FC FC fiber cable Tektronix part number Checking Option 3C and 4C 174 2322 00 28 Optical to Electrical P6701B used with Option 3C or Tektronix part number Checking Option 3C and 4C Converter P6703B used with Option 4C P6701B or P6703B optical to electrical converter You may replace items 9 10 11 14 15 16 and 20 with a Wavetek 9100 with options 100 and 600 for 500 MHz oscillo scopes or a Wavetek 9500 with option 100 and output head appropriate for the bandwidth of the oscilloscope s being tested Requires a TM 500 or TM 5000 Series Power Module Mainframe Warning The P6243 and P6245 probes that may be used with this oscilloscope provide an extremely low loading capacitance 1 pF to ensure the best possible signal reproduction These probes should not be used to measure signals exceeding 8 V or errors in signal measurement will be observed Above 40 V damage to the probe may result To make measurements beyond 8 V use either the P6139A probe good to 500 V or refer to the catalog for a r
268. t Type Test and Measurement Safety Class Class as defined in IEC 1010 1 Annex grounded product Overvoltage Category Overvoltage Category Il as defined in IEC 1010 1 Annex J Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2 as defined in IEC 1010 1 Note Rated for indoor use only TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 1 25 Warranted Characteristics Table 1 15 Certifications and compliances EC Declaration of Conformity TDS 500D and TDS 700D Meets intent of Directive 89 336 E EC for Electromagnetic Compatibility Compliance was demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the Official ournal of the European Communities EMC Directive 89 336 EEC EN 55011 Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions EN 50081 1 Emissions EN 60555 2 AC Power Line Harmonic Emissions EN 50082 1 Immunity IEC 801 2 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity IEC 801 3 RF Electromagnetic Field Immunity IEC 801 4 Electrical Fast Transient Burst Immunity IEC 801 5 Power Line Surge Immunity Australian Declaration of Conformity EMC TDS 500D and TDS 700D Conforms with the following standards in accordance with the Electromagnetic Compatibility Framework ASINZS 2064 1 2 Class A radiated and Conducted Emissions EC Declaration of Conformity TDS 600B EC Declaration of Conformity Low Voltage 1 26 Meets intent of Directive 89 336 E EC for Electromagnetic Compatibility Compliance was demonstrated to the fo
269. te Number H 96 Technician TDS 794D Performance Test Time Base System Long Term Sample Rate Delay Time Q 100 ns 10 0 ms Trigger System Accuracy Pulse Glitch or P ulse Width Hor scale lt 1 us Lower Limit Upper Limit Minimum e Incoming Outgoing Maximum 6 5 ns 6 5 ns Pulse Glitch or P ulse Width Hor scale gt 1 us Lower Limit Upper Limit Main Trigger DC Coupled Positive Slope Main Trigger DC Coupled Negative Slope Delayed Trigger DC Coupled Positive Slope Delayed Trigger DC Coupled Negative Slope CH1 Sensitivity 50 MHz Main CH1 Sensitivity 50 MHz Delayed CH1 AUX Trigger Input CH1 Sensitivity full bandwidth Main CH1 Sensitivity full bandwidth Delayed Output Signal Checks MAIN TRIGGER OUTPUT 50 Q High Low DELAYED TRIGGER OUTPUT 50 Q High Low High gt 1 0 V High gt 1 0 V 2 1 us 2 1 us 5 1047 V 5 1047 V 5 1047 V 5 1047 V Pass Fai Pass F ai Pass Fai Pass Fai Pass Fail Low x 0 25 V Low x 0 25 V CH 3 SIGNAL OUTPUT 50 Probe Compensator Output Signal Pk Pk gt 44 mV Pk Pk lt 66 mV Frequency CH1 Freq 950H2 a 1 050 kHz Voltage difference 495mV J ______ 505 mV 4 28 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests Signal Acquisition System Checks These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the signal acquisition system and are listed as c
270. tem 3 a flat bladed screwdriver Item 6 11 and a pair of angle tip tweezers Item 6 11 b Familiarize yourself with the modules illustrated in figures 6 1 6 2 and 6 3 Remove external modules Do in order the following procedures They are found under Procedures for External Modules which starts on page 6 16 a Line Fuse and Line Cord page 6 17 b Rear Cover and Cabinet page 6 18 c Front Cover Trim Ring Menu Buttons and Attenuator Panel page 6 22 d 12 Front Panel Assembly page 6 23 e Front Subpanel page 6 52 and Display Frame Assembly Remove the outer chassis modules Do in order the following procedures They are found under Procedures for Outer Chassis Modules which start on page 6 28 a Fan page 6 28 b 14 D1 Bus and Analog Power and Digital Power Cables page 6 28 23 SerPar Board page 6 30 d A29 Video Trigger Board with option 05 page 6 32 e All Processor Display Board page 6 35 f Hard Disk Drive with option 2M page 6 37 Top Cover and Board Brackets page 6 38 h 10 Acquisition Board page 6 40 i Floppy Disk Drive page 6 43 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures 4 Remove the inner chassis modules Do in order the following procedures They are found under Procedures for Inner Chassis Modules which start on page 6 47 a A16 Low Voltage Power Supply page 6 47 b A30 Display Assembly and Suppl
271. the CRT wear safety goggles and heavy gloves for protection Use Care When Servicing With Power On Dangerous voltages or currents may exist in this product Disconnect power remove battery if applicable and disconnect test leads before removing protective panels soldering or replacing components To avoid electric shock do not touch exposed connections X Radiation To avoid x radiation exposure do not modify or otherwise alter the high voltage circuitry or the CRT enclosure X ray emissions generated within this product have been sufficiently shielded TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual xiii Service Safety Summary xiv TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Preface Manual Structure This preface contains information needed to properly use this manual to service the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscopes as well as general information critical to safe and effective servicing of this oscilloscope The following models are covered TDS 500D TDS 520D TDS 540D and TDS 580D TDS 600B TDS 620B TDS 644B TDS 680B and TDS 684B TDS 700D TDS 724D TDS 754D TDS 784D and TDS 794D This manual is divided into sections such as Specifications and Theory of Operation Further it is divided into subsections such as Product Description and Removal and Installation Procedures Sections containing procedures also contain introductions to those procedures Be sure to read these introductions becaus
272. the right gives the typical effective bits for a sine wave adjusted to 9 2 divisions at 1 MHz 50 mV div 25 Effective Bits TDS 5400 amp 754D The chart on the right gives the typical effective bits for a sine wave adjusted to 9 2 divisions at 1 MHz 50 mV div 25 Effective Bits TDS 5800 784D amp 794D The chart on the right gives the typical effective bits for a sine wave adjusted to 9 2 divisions at 1 MHz 50 mV div 25 C 4GS s 6 6 bits 5 5 bits 4 5 bits Input frequency 1 MHz 9 2 divs 1 GHz 6 5 divs 2 GHz 6 5 divs TDS 794D only Frequency Limit Upper 250 MHz 250 MHz Bandwidth Limited Frequency Limit Upper 20 MHz 20 MHz Bandwidth Limited 5 2 bits TDS 680B amp 6848 only 10 MS s amp HiRes 9 7 bits N A 10 MS s amp HiRes 9 7 bits N A 10 MS s amp HiRes 9 7 bits N A N A TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 1 29 Typical Characteristics Table 1 16 Typical characteristics Signal acquisition system cont Step Response Settling Errors Description Settling error 96 at t Step amplitude 20ns 100ns 20 ms lt 2V lt 0 5 lt 0 2 0 196 lt 20V lt 1 0 lt 0 5 0 296 200 V 1 090 lt 0 5 0 296 Volts Div setting 1 mV div 100 mV div 101 mV div 1 V div 1 01 V div 10 V div Step Response Settling Errors TDS 794D 10 mV div 100 mV div
273. the waveform is updated on screen 4 Remove the test hookup Disconnect the probe from the channel input and the probe compensation terminals 4 12 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Brief Procedures Verify the File System Equipment required One probe such as the P 6243 P6245 P6139A or P6339A One 720 K or 1 44 Mbyte 3 5 inch DOS compatible disk You can use a disk of your own or you can use the TDS Family Programmer Disk Tektronix part number 063 3002 XX included in the TDS 500D TDS 600B amp TDS 700D User Manual Tektronix part number 071 0130 XX Prerequisites None 1 Install the test hookup and preset the oscilloscope controls a Hook up the signal source Install the probe on CH 1 Connect the probe tip to PROBE COMPENSATION SIGNAL on the front panel connect the probe ground to PROBE COMPENSATION GND See Figure 4 3 on page 4 8 b Insert the test disk Insert the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive to the left of the monitor W Position the disk so the metal shutter faces the drive Position the disk so the stamped arrow is on the top right side In other words place the angled corner in the front bottom location Push the disk into the drive until it goes all the way in and clicks into place c Initialize the oscilloscope W Press save recall SETUP m Press the main menu button Recall Factory Setup m Press the side menu button OK Confirm Factory Init d Modify de
274. threshold settings User Hold Time is the number selected by the user in the Hold Time Menu TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Installation Supplying Operating Power AN AN Power Cord Information NOTE Read all information and heed all warnings in this subsection before connecting the oscilloscope to a power source WARNING AC POWER SOURCE AND CONNECTION The oscilloscope operates from a single phase power source It has a three wire power cord and two pole three terminal grounding type plug The voltage to ground earth from either pole of the power source must not exceed the maximum rated operating voltage 250 volts Before making connection to the power source be sure the digitizing oscilloscope has a suitable two pole three terminal grounding type plug GROUNDING This instrument is safety Class 1 equipment IEC designation All accessible conductive parts are directly connected through the grounding conductor of the power cord to the grounded earthing contact of the power plug WARNING The power input plug must be inserted only in a mating receptacle with a grounding contact where earth ground has been verified by a qualified service person Do not defeat the grounding connection Any interruption of the grounding connection can create an electric shock hazard For electric shock protection the grounding connection must be made before making connection to the instrument s input or
275. tion 6 to reinstall the cabinet and other modules removed in step 1 Rotation Brightness and Equipment One 6X magnifier Item 16 DE BH GB ad required One J 17 Photometer with a J 1803 Luminance Probe Item 17 7000 Color Only 1 Access the inside of the oscilloscope See Removal and Installation Procedures in Section 6 to remove the cabinet 2 Adjust the display rotation a Display the Composite test pattern m Leave the oscilloscope powered off TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 5 23 Adjustment Procedures Switch No Open Closed Set the DIP switch located near the front of the All DRAM Processor Display as follows Power on the oscilloscope Press SHIFT then press UTILITY Repeatedly press the main menu button System until Diag Err is highlighted in the pop up menu Repeatedly press the main menu button Area until Display is highlighted in the pop up menu Repeatedly press the side menu button more until Composite appears in the side menu Push Composite Press the main menu button EXECUTE then press the side menu button Ok Confirm Run Test b Adjust RA01 TRACE ROTATION to minimize the display s tilt Use the frame around the display as a reference R401 is the second adjustment from the fan 3 Adjust the display brightness Locate R403 BRIGHTNESS It is one of the adjustments on the left side of the instrument located just ahead of the fan It is the fourth adjust
276. tor BNC T Male BNC to dual female BNC Tektronix part number Checking Trigger S ensitivity 103 0030 00 8 Coupler Dual Input Female BNC to dual male BNC Tektronix part number Checking Delay Between 067 0525 02 Channels 9 Generator DC Calibra Variable amplitude to 104 V accura Data Precision 8200 Checking DC Offset Gain tion Cy to 0 196 and Measurement Accuracy 10 Generator Calibration 500 mV square wave calibrator Tegam Tektronix PG 506A To check accuracy of CH 3 amplitude accuracy to 0 25 Calibration Generator Signal Out ll Generator Time Mark Variable marker frequency from 10 ms Tegam Tektronix TG 501A Checking Sample Rate and optional to 10 ns accuracy within 2 ppm Time Mark Generator Delay time Accuracy 12 Probe 10X A P6139A P6243 P6245 or P6339A Tektronix part number Signal Interconnection probe3 P6139A or P6245 13 3 5 inch 720 K or TDS Family Programmer Disk Checking File System Basic 1 44 Mbyte DOS com Tektronix part number Functionality patible floppy disk 063 3002 00 included with User Manual Tektronix part number 071 0130 XX 14 Generator Sine Wave 250 kHz to atleast 500 MHz higher Rohde amp Schwarz SMT or Checking Analog Bandwidth for higher bandwidth scopes Vari SMY14 Trigger Sensitivity Sample able amplitude from 60 mV to 2 Vp rate External Clock and into 50 Q Frequency accuracy 22 096 Delay Time Accuracy 4 16 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Perfor
277. trical or mechanical module assembly or part listed in Section 10 of this manual is a module Preparation Please Read AN A List of Modules WARNING Before doing this or any other procedure in this manual read the Safety Summary found at the beginning of this manual Also to prevent possible injury to service personnel or damage to this oscilloscope s components read Installation in Section 2 and Preventing ESD in this section This subsection contains the following items m This preparatory information that you need to properly do the procedures that follow List of tools required to remove all modules Three module locator diagrams for finding the External Modules see Figure 6 1 Outer Chassis Modules see Figure 6 2 and Inner Chassis Modules see Figure 6 3 in this oscilloscope Procedures for removal and reinstallation of the electrical and mechanical modules A disassembly procedure for removal of all the major modules from the oscilloscope at one time and for reassembly of those modules into the oscilloscope Such a complete disassembly is normally only done when completely cleaning the oscilloscope Instructions for doing the actual cleaning are found under Inspection and Cleaning at the beginning of this section WARNING Before doing any procedure in this subsection disconnect the power cord from the line voltage source Failure to do so could cause serious injury or death Secti
278. triggering at limits Do the following subparts in the order listed Press HORIZONTAL then press the main menu button Time Base Press the side menu button Delayed Only then press Delayed Triggerable in the same menu TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 59 Performance Tests 4 60 m Press SHIFT then press DELAYED TRIG Press the main menu button Level W Press the side menu button SET TO 50 CHECK that a stable trigger is obtained for the test waveform for both the positive and negative slopes of the waveform Use the TRIGGER LEVEL knob to stabilize the Main trigger Use the general purpose knob to stabilize the Delayed trigger Press the main menu button Slope then use the side menu to switch between trigger slopes See Figure 4 19 W Enter pass fail result for delayed trigger on the test record m Leave the Delayed trigger system triggered on the positive slope of the waveform before continuing to the next step Also return to the main time base Press HORIZONTAL then press the main menu button Time Base Press the side menu button Main Only m Press CLEAR MENU 3 Confirm the AUX Trigger input a Display the test signal m Remove the 10X attenuator and reconnect the cable to CH 1 m Set the test signal amplitude for about 2 5 divisions on screen m Now fine adjust the generator output until the CH 1 Amplitude readout indicates the amplitude is 250 mV Readout may fluctuate a
279. ts channel d Repeat substeps a through c to remove the gasket from its channel on the front casting 8 Reinstallation of EMI gaskets Press each EMI gasket back into its groove at the rear edge of the cabinet or front casting Make sure the ends of the gasket touch but do not overlap when installing Cut off excess length if required to prevent overlap 9 Reinstallation of cabinet and rear cover a Do in reverse order steps 3 and 4 to reinstall the cabinet TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 6 19 Removal and Installation Procedures b care not to bind or snag the cabinet on internal cabling redress cables an necessary c When sliding the cabinet be sure that the front edge of the cabinet aligns with the groove containing the EMI shield on the front casting d Be sure that the ridge around the rear chassis slides into the groove containing a second EMI cable on the rear of the cabinet e When reinstalling the four screws at the rear panel tighten them to 16 foot Ibs torque f Seethe procedure Line Fuse and Line Cord to reinstall the line cord which completes the oscilloscope reassembly 6 20 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Removal and Installation Procedures 5555555555 QYSSSSSSssses SYSSSSSsSssssss SYSY9YSSSssssssss SOVYSSSssssssss SOYSSSSSssss 99959959959 Figure 6 6 Rear cover and cabinet
280. ts on page 4 46 1 Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls a Hook up test signal m Connect one of the 50 Q cables to CH 1 See Figure 4 22 m Connect the other end of the cable just installed to the female BNC to clips adapter See Figure 4 22 m Connect the red clip on the adapter just installed to the PROBE COMPENSATION SIGNAL on the front panel connect the black clip to PROBE COMPENSATION GND See Figure 4 22 Oscilloscope Black lead to GND Female BNC to clip adapter 50 Q coaxial cable Figure 4 22 Initial test hookup b Initialize the oscilloscope Press save recall SETUP Press the main menu button Recall Factory Setup 4 66 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests Press the side menu button OK Confirm Factory Init c Modify the initialized front panel control settings Set the horizontal SCALE to 200 us Press SET LEVEL TO 50 Use the vertical POSITION knob to center the display on screen Press SHIFT then press ACQUIRE MENU Press the main menu button Mode then press the side menu button Average Select 128 averages with the keypad or the general purpose knob 2 Confirm that the Probe Compensator signal is within limits for frequency a Measure the frequency of the probe compensation signal Press MEASURE then press the main menu button Select Measrmnt for Ch Repeatedly press the side
281. uency Reject cies above 60 Hz Attenuates signals below 60 Hz Three times the DC coupled limits One and one half times the DC coupled limits from DC to 30 kHz Attenuates signals above 30 kHz One and one half times the DC coupled limits for frequencies above 80 kHz Attenuates signals below 80 kHz 1 0 division from DC to 500 MHz at vertical settings gt 10 mV div and lt 1 V div at the BNC input 1 0 division from DC to 500 MHz at vertical settings gt 10 mV div and lt 1 V div at the BNC input 1 0 division at vertical settings gt 10 mV div and lt 1 V div at the BNC input For vertical settings gt 10 mV div and lt 1 V div at the BNC input Triggering type Logic Events Delay Minimum pulse width Not Applicable 1 ns for either or pulse widths Minimum re arm Minimum time width between channels lns lns Not Applicable 2 ns For vertical settings 10 mV div and 3 1 V div at the BNC input Pulse class Glitch Runt Time Qualified Runt Width Timeout Slew Rate Minimum pulse width 1 5 2 ns 2 ns lns 1 5 600 ps8 Minimum re arm width 2 ns 5 of Glitch Width Setting 2 ns TDS 600B 7 ns 5 of Width Setting 2 ns 5 of Width Upper Limit Setting 2 ns 5 of Width Upper Limit Setting TDS 600B 7 ns 5 of Delta Time Setting TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 1 31 Typical Characteristics Table 1 17 Typical characteristics
282. uired Pulse Width Triggering One sine wave generator Item 14 One 10X attenuator Item 1 One 50 precision coaxial cable Item 5 Prerequisites See page 4 15 1 Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls a Initialize the instrument Press save recall SETUP Press the main menu button Recall Factory Setup W Press the side menu button OK Confirm Factory Init b Modify the default setup Set the horizontal SCALE to 10 ns on the TDS 600B and 12 5 ns on the TDS 500D 700D m Press VERTICAL MENU then press the main menu button Coupling Now press the side menu button Q to toggle it to the 50 Q setting This step is not required on the TDS 794D Hook up the test signal source Connect the output of the sine wave generator Item 14 to CH 1 Do this through a 50 Q precision coaxial cable followed by a 10X attenuator See Figure 4 14 The 10X attenuator is optional if the SG503 is used TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 49 Performance Tests Sine Wave Generator Oscilloscope 10X Attenuator 50 O coaxial cable Figure 4 14 Initial test hookup 2 Confirm the trigger system is within time accuracy limits for pulse glitch or pulse width triggering Horizontal Scale lt 1 us a Display the test signal Set the output of the sine wave generator for a 100 MHz five division sine wave on screen Press SET LEVEL TO 50
283. ure 4 36 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Performance Tests Tek Run 250MS s Sample am 2 L i Haus zi chm P Honz n PR a Time position Length Scale 50 5000 Horizontal Position 1 Set to 10 Set to 50 Set to 90 S2mV wo ES M 200ns vid Chi 1 7 IC ee ae Figure 4 36 Line count accuracy test setup waveform TDS 684B shown Press CURSOR Press the main menu Function Press the side menu V Bars Using the General Purpose knob place the left cursor directly over the trigger T icon Press SELECT Turn the General Purpose knob to adjust the right cursor for a cursor delta reading of 6 780us Use the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob to position the right cursor to center screen Verify that the cursor is positioned on a positive slope of the burst signal See Figure 4 37 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 4 81 Performance Tests 4 82 Tek Run 250MS s E UE 282mv M 200ns Vid Chi 1 7 Function Mode Ime p rae Units V Bars indep Seconds Cursor Function Paired COICOICOICOICO aap ae ae Figure 4 37 Line count accuracy correct result wavefo
284. ursors to measure the skew from CH1 to CH2 CH1 to CH3 and to use AXI and AX2 instead of CH3 and CHA if your TDS model is so equipped Write down these three numbers in the first measurement column of Table 4 5 Note that these numbers may be either positive or negative Repeat the procedure from step 1 c through 2 e Again use the cursors to measure the skew from CH1 to CH2 CHI to CH3 and CHI to CH4 Write down these numbers in the second measurement column of Table 4 5 Note that these numbers may be either positive or negative Add the first CH1 to CH2 skew measurement to the second CH1 to CH2 skew measurement and divide the result by 2 Use Table 4 5 Add the first CH1 to CH3 AX1 on some TDS models skew measure ment to the second CH1 to CH3 skew measurement and divide the result by 2 Use Table 4 5 Add the first CH1 to CHA AX2 on some TDS models skew measure ment to the second CH1 to CH4 skew measurement and divide the result by 2 Use Table 4 5 Check against limits CHECK that the largest of the three results from steps m and n is between 100 ps and 100 ps for the TDS 600B or between 50 ps and 50 ps for the TDS 500D 700D Enter time on the test record Table 4 5 Delay between channels worksheet Add first and First Second second Divide sum Coupling measurement measurement measurements by 2 CH1 to CH2 skew CH1 to CH3 skew CH1 to CH4 skew 3
285. ut male BNC output Example Tektronix part number 013 0028 00 Tektronix part number 013 0227 00 Tektronix part number 013 0076 00 Tektronix part number 003 0675 00 Tektronix part number 011 0059 02 Purpose Probe Adjustment Probe Adjustment Signal Coupling for P robe Compensator Output Check Software based Adjustments used as a probe and Manual Adjustments Software based Adjustments 6 Attenuator 2X Ratio 2X impedance 50 O Tektronix part number Software based Adjustments connectors female BNC input 011 0069 02 male BNC output 7 Cable GPIB IEEE Std 488 1 1987 Tektronix part number Software based Adjustments IEEE Std 488 2 1987 002 0991 01 8 Coupler Dual Input Female BNC to dual male BNC Tektronix part number Software based Adjustments 067 0525 02 9 Cable Precision 50 36 in male to male BNC Tektronix part number Software based Adjustments Coaxial connectors 012 0482 00 10 Connector Dual Female BNC to dual banana Tektronix part number Software based Adjustments Banana 103 0090 00 11 Generator Calibration High Amplitude pulse with variable amplitude of at least 60 V Tegam Tektronix PG 506A Calibration Generator 2 Probe Adjustment 12 Generator DC Calibration Variable amplitude to 104 V accuracy to 0 1 Data Precision 82001 Software based Adjustments 13 14 15 Generator Sine Wave Meter Level and Powe
286. vels is the high 1 state and the more negative level is the low 0 state Signal states may also be described as true meaning their active state or false meaning their nonactive state The specific voltages that constitute a high or low state vary among the electronic devices Active low signals are indicated by a tilde prefixed to the signal name RESET Signal names are considered to be either active high active low or to have both active high and active low states Module Overview This module overview describes the basic operation of each functional circuit block as shown in Figure 9 2 General The TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscopes have four channels Each channel provides a calibrated vertical scale factor Input Signal Path signal enters the oscilloscope through a probe connected to a BNC on the A10 Attenuator Acquisition board Attenuators Circuitry in the attenuator selects the input coupling termination and the attenuation factor The processor system by way of the acquisition system controls the attenuators For example if 50 2 input termination is TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 3 1 Theory of Operation Tube Assembly selected and the input is overloaded the processor system switches the input to the 1 MQ position on TDS models with 1 MQ termination Probe Coding Interface Probe coding interface signals pass through the attenuator portion of the A10 Attenuator A
287. wing functions m Color waveforms readouts graticule Intensity waveforms readouts graticule etc m Style of waveform display s vectors or dots intensified or nonintensified samples and infinite or variable persistence m Display format XY or YT m Graticule format type m Waveform interpolation filter and readout options From the Utility menu you can configure the GPIB port talk listen address etc and access internal routines for self diagnostics and self compensation Instructions for setting up communication over the GPIB are found in Section 5 Adjustment Procedures TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual 2 15 Operating Instructions 2 16 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual E C 8 Theory of Operation This section describes the electrical operation of the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscopes using the major circuit blocks or modules This section has two main parts W Logic Conventions describes how logic functions are discussed and represented in this manual m Module Overview describes circuit operation from a functional circuit block perspective Logic Conventions The oscilloscopes contain many digital logic circuits This manual refers to these circuits with standard logic symbols and terms Unless otherwise stated all logic functions are described using the positive logic convention the more positive of the two logic le
288. x V div TDS 5000 7000 1 0 x reading Net Offset Offset Accuracy 0 06 div x V div Delta volts between any two averages TDS 600B 1 5 x reading of gt 16 waveforms acquired under the 0 1 div x V div 0 3 mV Same setup and ambient conditions TDS 5000 7000 1 0 x reading 0 1 div x V div 0 3 mV Accuracy Offset TDS 600B TDS 500D 700D All except TDS 794D Volts Div setting Offset accuracy Offset accuracy 1 mV div 100 mV div 0 2 x Net Off 0 2 x Net Off set 1 5 mV set 1 5 mV 0 6 div x V div 0 1 div x V div 101 mV div 1 V div 0 25 Net Off 00 25 x Net Off set 15 mV set 15 mV 0 6 div x V div 0 1 div x V div 1 01 V div 10 V div 0 25 NetOff 00 25 x Net Off set 150 mV set 150 mV 0 6 div x V div 0 1 div x V div Accuracy Offset Volts Div setting TDS 794D Offset accuracy TDS TMD 10 mV div 100 mV div 0 2 x Net Off set 1 5 mV 0 1 div x V div 101 mV div 1 V div 0 25 x Net Off set 15 mV 0 1 div x V div Analog Bandwidth DC 50 Coupled TDS 620B amp 644B TDS 680B amp 684B and Bandwidth selection is FULL Volts Div Bandwidth Bandwidth TUS 2008 10 mV div 1 V div DC 500 MHz DC 1GHz 5 mV div 9 95 mV div DC 450 MHz DC 750 MHz 2 mV div 4 98 mV div DC 300 MHz DC 600 MHz 1 mV div 1 99 mV div DC 250 MHz DC 500 MHz
289. y Fuse page 6 48 5 Disassemble the chassis a Set the assembly so its bottom is down on the work surface and its front is facing you b Remove the six screws securing the front subpanel to the main chassis See Figure 6 24 for screw location c Lift the front subpanel up away from the main chassis d Now remove the five screws securing the rear chassis to the main chassis and separate the two chassis See Figure 6 20 for screw location 6 Reassembly Do the following substeps a Reassemble the chassis Align the rear chassis to the main chassis and reinstall the five screws removed in step 5 align the front subpanel to the main chassis and reinstall the six screws removed in step 5 NOTE The following substeps refer you to procedures for installing each module removed When reinstalling the modules ignore any instructions that require connecting a cable or bus to an module that you have not yet installed The necessary connections will be made when you install the missing module later b Reinstall the inner chassis modules Do in the order listed below When reinstalling do the removal steps in reverse order These procedures are found under Procedures for Inner Chassis Modules which start on page 6 47 m 30 Display Assembly and Supply Fuse page 6 48 m A16 Low Voltage Power Supply page 6 47 c Reinstall the outer chassis modules Do in the order listed in the following procedures When doing t
290. yed Negative TRUE High to low transition indicates the trigger occurred Trigger Outputs Fuse Rating Either of two fuses may be used a 0 25 x 1 25 UL 198 6 6A FAST 250 V ora 5mm x 20 mm IEC 127 5A T 250 V 1 Each fuse type requires its own fuse cap Table 1 8 Nominal traits Data handling and reliability Name Description Time Data R etention Battery life gt 5 years Nonvolatile Memory 2 Floppy disk drive 3 5 inch 720 K or 1 44 Mbyte DOS 3 3 or later compatible Internal hard disk drive 175 Mbyte capacity option 2M available on the TDS 500D and 700D External data storage lomega Zip drive compatible 1 The times that reference waveforms stored setups and calibration constants are retained Data is maintained by small lithium thionyl chloride batteries internal to the memory ICs At the time of manufacture no special disposal requirements were in effect for these batteries as the amount of hazardous material contained was below the regulated threshold Consult your local waste disposal agency for proper disposal 1 16 TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Nominal Traits Table 1 9 Nominal traits Mechanical Name Cooling Method Construction Material Weight Description Forced air circulation with no air filter Clearance is required Refer to the TDS 500D TDS 600B amp TDS 700D User Manualfor minimum clearance dimensions Chassis parts constructed of alu
291. you from the Beaverton Oregon service center It is not updated to match current modules of the same type Again each module comes with a 90 day service warranty For More Information Contact your local Tektronix service center or sales engineer for more information on any of the repair or adjustment services just described TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Introduction Before You Begin This manual is for servicing the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Oscilloscopes To prevent injury to yourself or damage to the oscilloscope do the following tasks before you attempt service m Read the Safety Summary found at the beginning of this manual m Read Service Strategy in this section and Supplying Operating Power in section 2 When using this manual for servicing be sure to read and follow all warnings cautions and notes TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual xxi Introduction xxii TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D Service Manual Specifications Product Description This section begins with a general description of the traits of the TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D oscilloscopes Three sections follow one for each of three classes of traits nominal traits warranted characteristics and typical characteristics The TDS 500D TDS 600B and TDS 700D oscilloscopes are portable four chan nel instruments suitable for use in a variety of test and measurement applications and systems Table 1 1 l

Service Manual TDS 500D, TDS 600B & TDS 700D Digitizing

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Service Manual TDS 500D, TDS 600B &amp; TDS 700D Digitizing

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Service Manual TDS 500D, TDS 600B & TDS 700D Digitizing